Some symbolic expressions for number seven

Share it with your friends Like

Thanks! Share it with your friends!

Close

Some symbolic expressions for number seven

CONTENS

अग अचल अत्यष्टि अद्रि अद्रिः अब्धिः अश्व अश्वः ईति ऋषि कुभृत् तुरंग तुरंगः तुरग नग नगः पर्वत पर्वतः भूः भूधर भूभृत् भूमिः भूमिधर महीध्र मुनि मुनिः लीकः लोक वाजिन् शैल साप्त साप्तदश्य स्वर स्वरः हय हयः

अग — aga Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899aga m. a snake [in this sense perhaps rather a-ga]

m. the sun

m. a water-jar

aga «a-ga» mfn. ( «gam»). unable to walk

aga «a-ga» m. a mountain

aga «a-ga» m. a tree

aga «a-ga» m. the number seven.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

aga a. [na gacchatīti; gam-ḍa. na. ta].

(1) Unable to walk, not going, not in a position to go; ago vṛṣalaḥ

śītena P. VI. 3. 77 Sk.

(2) Unapproachable. —gaḥ

(1) A tree; sadānato yena viṣāṇinā’gaḥ Śi. 4. 63.

(2) A mountain; also a stone; pratyāpagaṁ pratyagaṁ Mahānāṭaka.

(3) A snake.

(4) The sun (na gacchati vakragatyā paścimaṁ, tasya hi

vakragatyabhāvo jyotiṣaprasiddhaḥ; or, ‘not going’, the earth by its

diurnal rotation causing day and night).

(5) A water-jar, as in agastya (kuṁbhastyāna).

(6) The number seven (from the seven kulācalas).

— Comp.

—ātmajā the daughter of the mountain, N. of Pārvatī.

—okas m. [agaḥ parvataḥ oko yasya] 1. a mountain-dweller. 2. a

bird (vṛkṣavāsī). 3. the animal śarabha supposed to have 8 legs. 4. a lion.

—ja a. (agāt parvataśilāto jāyate; jaṇ-ḍa.) produced on a mountain

or from a tree; roaming or wandering through mountains, wild (giricara);

kacācitau viṣvagivāgajau gajau Ki. 1. 36. (

—jaṁ) bitumen.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

aga m. 1) «Schlange» H. an. 2, 29. — 2) «Sonne» ibid. — 3) «Wasserkrug»:

agaḥ kumbhaḥ. tatra styānaḥ saṁhata ityagastyaḥ DURGAD. zu NIR. 1,

5; s. u. agastya. — Vgl. ag.

aga (3. a + ga «gehend») P. 6, 3, 77. 1) adj. «nicht gehend, nicht im

Stande zu gehen»: ago vṛṣalaḥ śītena P. 6, 3, 77, Sch. — 2) m. a) «Baum»

AK. 3, 4, 20. H. 1114. an. 2, 28. MED. g. 2. ŚIŚ. 4, 63. — b) «Berg» AK. 3,

4, 20. Sch. zu H. 1027. an. 2, 29. MED. g. 2. P. 6, 3, 77, Sch. ŚĀK. 166, v.

l. — Vgl. agaccha, agama und naga.

aga 2) b) R. 3, 22, 24.

aga vgl. ṣaḍaga.

aga in der Bed. «Berg» Bez. «der Zahl sieben» SŪRYAS. 2, 35. 3, 44. 8, 3.

7.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

aga a-ga, m.

1. A mountain.

2. A tree.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

aga (*a. not moving;) m. tree or mountain.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

aga a-ga, m. tree; mountain.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

aga ma vakragatau . kuṭilagamane . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. ma agayati

agati sarpaḥ . iti durgādāsaḥ ..

aga i gatau . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. gatyāṁ i aṅgyate . iti durgādāsaḥ ..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

aga idit gatau bhvādi° para° . aṅgati . āṅgīt . lyuṭ aṅganam asun aṅgaḥ .

aga vakragatau bhvādi° para° ghaṭādi . agati āgīt . agayati .

aga pu° na gacchatīti gama—ḍa na° ta° . vṛkṣe, parvate, ca .

gamanākartari śūdrādau tri° . na gacchati vakragatyā paścimam . sūrye

tasya hi vakragatyabhāvaḥ jyotiṣaprasiddhaḥ . vakraśīghragatiścaiva

bhavet bhaumādipañcake ityukteḥ āryabhaṭṭa mate tu pṛthivyāeva

gatimattvena dinarātrisambhavāt sūryasya na gatimattvam .

saptasaṁkhyāyāñca kulācalānāṁ saptatvena teṣāñca prādhānyāt

pradhānena vyapadeśābhavantīti nyāyāt tathātvam .

अचल — acala Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899acala «a-cala» mf («ā») n. not moving, immovable

acala «a-cala» m. a mountain, rock

acala «a-cala» m. a bolt or pin

acala «a-cala» m. the number seven

acala «a-cala» m. N. of śiva and of the first of the nine deified persons,

called «white Balas» among the Jainas

acala «a-cala» m. of a Devarshi

acala «a-cala» mf («ā») n. («ā») f. the earth

acala «a-cala» m. one of the ten degrees which are to be ascended by a

Bodhisattva before becoming a Buddha.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

acala a. Steady, immoveable, motionless, fixed, permanent;

citranyastamivācalaṁ cāmaraṁ V. 1. 4; tapase’dhivastumacalāmacalaḥ

Ki. 6. 18; samādhau -lā buddhiḥ Bg. 2. 53; yatra sthāṇurivācalaḥ S. 7. 11

immoveable. —laḥ

(1) A mountain; (rarely) a rock.

(2) A bolt or pin (śaṁku).

(3) The number seven.

(4) N. of Śiva, of the soul, of the first of the 9 deified persons among

Jainas. —lā The earth (so called because the earth is immoveable

according to one view, or, according to Ārya Bhaṭṭa who rejects this

view, acalāḥ parvatāḥ saṁtyatra, astyarthe ac; acalatvāt svakakṣāto

bahirgamanāṁbhāvādvā). —laṁ Brahma.

— Comp.

—kanyakā, —sutā, —duhitā, —tanayā &c. N. of Pārvatī, daughter of

the Himālaya mountain.

—kīlā (ba. the earth (immoveably fixed or pinned).

—ja, —jāta a. mountain-born. (

—jā —jātā) N. of Pārvatī.

—tviṣ a. [acalā tviṭ yasya] of fixed or permanent lustre or colour.

(—m, -ṭ) a cuckoo (bahuprakṣālanenāpi mālinyānapagamāt sthirā tviṭ).

(f.) permanent colour.

—dviṣ m. [acalān dveṣṭi, dviṣ-kvip] the enemy of mountains,

epithet of Indra who clipped off their wings.

—dhṛtiḥ f. a metre of four lines of 16 short syllables each

(gītyāryā). —patiḥ, —rāṭ lord of mountains, N. of Himālaya; so -adhipaḥ, —

śreṣṭhaḥ. —saptamī N. of a book in the bhaviṣyottarapurāṇa; the 7th day

of the bright half of Aśvina.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

acala (3. a + cala) 1) adj. f. ā «unbeweglich»: yadā — acalāni calanti

ṢAḌV. BR. in Ind. St. I, 41, 20. R. 1, 44, 2. 2, 15, 42. 6, 79, 49. ŚĀK. 170.

Uebertr.: yadā sthāsyati niścalā. samādhāvacalā buddhiḥ BHAG. 2, 53. —

2) m. a) «Berg» AK. 2, 3, 1. TRIK. 3, 3, 379. H. 1027. an. 3, 623. MED. l.

59. R. 1, 6, 24. 40, 4. N. 5, 3. 12, 4. acalendra R. 2, 94, 6. 3, 33, 38. Am

Ende eines adj. comp. f. ā R. 4, 26, 15. — b) «Nagel, Bolzen» H. an. 3,

623. MED. l. 59. — c) Śiva, ŚIV. — d) «der erste der 9 weissen» Bala’s H.

698. — 3) f. acalā a) «Erde» AK. 2, 1, 2. TRIK. 3, 3, 379. H. 936. an. 3,

624. MED. l. 59. — b) Name einer der 10 Erden bei den Buddhisten; s. zu

H. 233.

acala 2) e) N. pr. eines Dichters Verz. d. Oxf. H. 123,b,12. eines

Lexicographen: -kośa UJJVAL. zu UṆĀDIS. 3, 68. — 3) a) MṚCCH. 178, 1.

— b) lies Bez. «einer der 9 Stufen, die ein» Bodhisattva «zu ersteigen hat,

bevor er» Buddha «wird», und füge DAŚABHŪMĪŚVARA 95 hinzu. — c) N.

pr. einer der Mütter im Gefolge Skanda’s MBH. 9, 2632. — d) N. pr. einer

Rākṣasī Lot. de la b. l. 240.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

acala 1 I 1) (General.) Acala was the son of Subala, a King of Gāndhāra.

He was Śakuni’s brother and a heroic Charioteer on the side of the

Kauravas. (M.B. Udyoga Parva, Chapter 168, Verse 1).

acala 2 II Name of a bull. Among the pārṣadas of Skanda we see the bull

named Acala. (M.B. Śalya Parva, Chapter 85, Verse 74).

acala 3 III An epithet of Mahāviṣṇu. Among the thousand names of

Mahāviṣṇu we see the name Acala also. (M.B. Anuśāsana Parva, Chapter

149, Verse 92).

acala Subrahmaṇya, who was born from Śiva’s semen which fell into the

fire, was made Commander-in-Chief (Generalissimo) by the gods to kill

Tārakāsura. A large number of warriors and mothers were assigned to

assist him. A woman named Acalā was included among those mothers.

(M.B. Śalya Parva, Chapter 40, Verse 14).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

acala a-cala.

I. adj., f. lā.

1. Immovable.

2. Steady, Pañc. 202, 19.

II. m. A mountain.

— Comp. kula-, m. a principal mountain. tuhina-, m. Himālaya. mahā-, m.

a great mountain.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

acala a. the same; m. mountain, f. ā the earth.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

acala a-cala, a. immovable; m. mountain.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

acala pu° na calaḥ .. (goṁja) iti khyāte śaṅkau . parvate, acalāḥ sāgarāḥ

grāmāḥ prāsādadhavalā gṛhāḥ dhāritaṁ ca tvayāsarvamiti

pṛthivīprārthanāmantraḥ . acalaeṣa bhavāniva rājate iti māghaḥ .

pṛthivyāṁ strī . bhūmeracalatvādikamuktaṁ si° śi° go° bhūmeḥ piṇḍaḥ

śaśāṅkajñakaviravikujejyārkinakṣatrakakṣāvṛttairvṛtto vṛtaḥ san

mṛdanilasalilavyomatejomayo’yam . nānyāghāraḥ svaśaktyaiva viyati

niyataṁ tiṣṭhatīhāsya pṛṣṭhe niṣṭhaṁ viśvaṁ ca

śaśvatsadanujamanujādityadaityaṁ samantāt . sarvataḥ

parvatārāmagrāmacaityacayaiścitaḥ . kadambakusumagranthiḥ

kesaraprakarairiva . yathoṣṇatārkānalayośca, śītatā vidhau, drutiḥ ke,

kaṭhinatvamaśmani . maruccalī bhūracalā svabhāvato yato vicitrā vata

vastuśaktayaḥ . ākṛṣṭaśaktiśca mahī tayā yat khasthaṁ guru

svābhimukhaṁ svaśaktyā . ākṛṣyate tatpatatīva bhāti same samantāt

kva? patatviyaṁ khe iti . āryabhaṭṭamate tu asyāścalatve’pi acalāḥ

parvatāḥ santyatra astyarthe’ci . acalavattvāt svakakṣāto

vahirgamanābhāvādvā acalatvam . tena ca tasyāścalatvaṁ

dṛṣṭāntavidhayoktaṁ tacca vistarato bhūgolaśabde vakṣyate .

calanaśūnye tri° tasmāttvamacalobhaveti kalasasthāpanamantraḥ .

tasmānmama gṛhe nityaṁ lakṣmi! tvamacalā bhaveti purā° .

samādhāvacalā buddhiriti, gītā, acalā bhaktirīśvare iti purā° . na calati

svabhāvāt . śive pu° tasya sthāṇutvāt tathātvam . brahmaṇi na° .

niṣkalaṁ niṣkriyaṁ śāntamiti śrutyā asya

sarvakriyāśūnyatvokteracalatvam . ātmani pu° nityaḥ sarvagataḥ

sthāṇuracalo’yaṁ sanātana iti gītā .

अत्यष्टि — atyaṣṭi Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899atyaṣṭi «aty-aṣṭi» f. a metre (of four lines, each containing seventeen

syllables)

f. the number seventeen.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

atyaṣṭi (ati + aṣṭi) f. «ein Metrum von 68 Silben»: tato ‘ṣṭāṣaṣṭiratyaṣṭiḥ

ṚV. PRĀT. 16, 54. Als Beispiel wird ebend. 58. angeführt ṚV. 9, 111, 1.

Das Schema ist: 12, 12, 8

8,

12, 8. VS. Append. LXIV. In der späteren Metrik «ein Metrum von 4 x 17

Silben» COLEBR. Misc. Ess. II, 162.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

atyaṣṭi f. N. of a metre.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

atyaṣṭi ati+aṣṭi, f. a metre (4 X 17 syllables.).

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

atyaṣṭi strī atikrāntā aṣṭiṁ ṣoḍaśākṣarapādikāṁ vṛttimekākṣarādhikyāt

atyā° sa° . saptadaśākṣarapādake chandobhede .

अद्रि — adri Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899adri m. ( «ad» , a stone, a rock, a mountain

m. a stone for pounding Soma with or grinding it on

m. a stone for a sling, a thunderbolt

m. a mountain-shaped mass of clouds

m. a cloud (the mountains are the clouds personified, and regarded as

the enemies of Indra)

m. a tree

m. the sun

m. N. of a measure

m. the number seven

m. N. of a grandson of Pṛithu.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

adri m. Uṇ. 4, 66. 1) «Stein», insbesondere a) «die zum» Soma «schlagen

gebrauchten Steine» ṚV. 1, 109, 3. 118, 3. 137, 1. 165, 4. 10, 94. KĀTY.

ŚR. 9, 1, 5. 4, 5. 21. 5, 14. 10, 1, 4. 11, 5, 9. (im ŚAT. BR. stets grāvan).

— b) «der Schleuderstein»: ājāvadriṁ vāvasānasya nartayan ṚV. 1, 151, 3.

— 2) «Gestein, Gebirge»: divi sūryamadadhātsomamadrau ṚV. 5, 85, 2. 1,

73, 6. «Berg» AK. 2, 3, 1. 3, 4, 165. H. 1027. an. 2, 392. MED. r. 6. HIḌ. 4,

11. MEGH. 2. 14. 45. 60. RAGH. 2, 27. 3, 63. VID. 20. — 3) «Wolke,

Gewölk» (wegen der Aehnlichkeit der am Horizonte liegenden

«Wolkenmassen» mit «Gebirgen») NAIGH. 1, 10. Häufig können 2. und 3.

kaum von einander geschieden werden, da das Erbrechen der Festen

durch die Götter zur Wiedergewinnung der Rinder sowohl auf die

«Wolken» als auch auf die «Gebirge» bezogen werden kann:

bṛhaspatirbhinadadriṁ vidadgāḥ ṚV. 1, 62, 3. asūdayatsukṛte

garbhamadriḥ 3, 31, 7. bhānumadreḥ 7, 6, 2. 1, 7, 3. 61, 7. 70, 4. 71, 3.

85, 5. 10, 45, 6. u. s. w. Die adrayaḥ («Berge, Wolken» personificirt)

werden unter den 7 Feinden Indra’s aufgeführt H. 174; vgl. adridviṣ und

adribhid. — 4) «Baum» AK. 3, 4, 165. H. 1114. an. 2, 393. MED. r. 6. — 5)

«Sonne» AK. TRIK. 1, 1, 99. H. an. MED. HĀR. 11; vgl. aga, das auch

«Berg, Baum» und «Sonne» bedeutet. — 6) N. eines Maasses ŚABDAR. im

ŚKDR. — 7) N. pr. ein Sohn Viśvagaśva’s und Grossohn Pṛthu’s MBH. 3,

13517; vgl. ārdra. — NIR. 9, 9. wird adrayaḥ = parvatāḥ etym. durch

adaraṇīyāḥ erklärt.

adri 2) Bez. «der Zahl sieben» (vgl. kulaparvata) WEBER, JYOT. 101, 2.

adri 2) als Bez. «der Zahl sieben» (vgl. Nachträge) SŪRYAS. 1, 24. 31. 34.

2, 20.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

adri was a King, the son of Viṣvagaśvā and father of Yuvanāśvā. (M.B.

Vana Parva, Chapter 202, Verse 3).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

adri adri, m.

1. A stone, Chr. 293, 3 = Rigv. 1, 88, 3.

2. A mountain.

3. A cloud, Chr. 291, 5 = Rigv. 1, 85, 5.

4. A proper name.

— Comp. asta-, m. the mountain called asta (q. cf.). kuta-, m. a principal

mountain. tuṣāra-, tuhina-, and prāleya-, m. Himālaya.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

adri m. rock, stone, esp. bruising or hurling stone; mountain, cloud.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

adri a-dri, m. [not splitting], rock, hill, mountain-range; stone (as

missile); pressingstone; cloud;

-grahaṇa, n. reverberation;

-dugdha, pp. milked, i. e. pressed out, with stones;

-pati, m. Himālaya;

-kanyā f. Pārvatī;

-budhna, a. founded on rock;

-bhed-ana, n. cleaving of rocks.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

adri pu° ada—krin . parvate, tadavayave prastare grāvaṇi . vṛkṣe, sūrye,

meghe, parimāṇabhede ca tadbhedaśca parimāṇaśabde vakṣyate tatra

grāvaṇi, adriṣutaḥ, meghe adrimātā, parvate,

duhitaramanukampyāmadrirādāya dorbhyāmiti kumā° .

अद्रिः — adriḥ Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

adriḥ [ad-krin Uṇ. 4. 65; according to Nir. fr. dṝ to tear or ad to eat.]

(1) A mountain.

(2) A stone, especially one for pounding Soma with or grinding it on.

(3) A thunderbolt (ādṛṇāti yena Nir.).

(4) A tree.

(5) The sun.

(6) A mass of clouds (probably so called from its resemblance to a

mountain); a cloud (ādarayitavyo bhavati hyasau udakārthaṁ Nir.) mostly

Ved.

(7) A kind of measure.

(8) The number 7.

— Comp.

—īśaḥ, patiḥ, nāthaḥ &c. 1. the lord of mountains, the Himālaya. 2.

N. of Śiva (Lord of Kailāsa).

—karṇī a plant (aparājitā) Clitoria Ternatea Lin.

—kīlā [adrayaḥ kulaparvatāḥ kīlāḥ śaṁkava iva yasyāḥ] the earth. (

—laḥ) N. of the mountain viṣkuṁbha. —kukṣiḥ a mountain cave,

mountain side R. 2. 38.

—ja a. [adrau jāyate; jaṇ-ḍa] produced from, or found among,

mountains, mountain-born. (

—jā) 1. a plant (saiṁhalī). 2.

—kanyā, —tanayā-sutā &c. Pārvatī. (

—jaṁ) red chalk (śilājatu). —jāta a. mountain-born. (

—taḥ) 1. forest conflagration. 2. the ‘Sun-born’, Hamsa or Swan. 3.

form. 4. the Supreme Being.

—jūta, —dugdha Ved. [tṛ. ta.] expressed or extracted by means of

stones.

—tanayā, —naṁdinī 1. N. of Pārvatī. 2. N. of a metre of 4 lines,

each having 23 syllables.

—dviṣ-bhid m. [adriṁ dveṣṭi bhinatti vā, dviṣ-bhid-kvip] the enemy

or splitter of mountains (or clouds personified), epithet of Indra.

—droṇi-ṇī f. 1. a mountain valley. 2. a river taking its rise in a

mountain.

—patiḥ —rājaḥ &c. See -īśa. —barhas a. Ved. [adrerbarha iva barho

yasya] as strong or hard as a mountain; mountain-high (?).

—budhna a. [adrerbudhna iva budhno yasya] rooted in a mountain

or rock; as hard as a stone or mountain.

—bhū a. [adrau bhavati jāyate] mountain-born. (

—bhūḥ) N. of a plant (ākhukarṇī or aparājitā). —mātṛ Ved. [adriḥ

meghaḥ tajjalaṁ mimīte, adrermātā vā mā-tṛc] producing water from

clouds (maghajalanirmātṛ); having a mountain for the mother (?).

—vahniḥ forest conflagration.

—śayyaḥ (having the mountain kailāsa for his bed) N. of Śiva; cf. —

īśa, -iṁdra, —śṛṁgaṁ, —sānu mountain peak.

—suta (-ṣuta), —saṁhata a. prepared or expressed by means of

stones.

—sāraḥ [adreḥ sāra iva ṣa. ta.] ‘the essence of mountains’, iron.

(—a.) hard like a mountain; -maya made of iron or very hard.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

adriḥ puṁ, (adiśadīti krin ..) sūryaḥ . parbataḥ . vṛkṣaḥ . ityamaraḥ ..

parimāṇaviśeṣaḥ . iti śabdaratnāvalī .. (śākhī . mānabhedaḥ . saptāṅkaḥ .

parbatamūṣikā ..)

अब्धिः — abdhiḥ Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

abdhiḥ [āpaḥdhīyaṁte atra, dhā-ki]

(1) The ocean, receptacle of water; (fig. also), duḥkha-, kārya-,

jñāna- &c.; store or reservoir of anything.

(2) A pond, lake.

(3) (In Math.) A symbolical expression for the number 7; sometimes

for 4.

— Comp.

—agniḥ the submarine fire.

—kaphaḥ, —phenaḥ 1. froth, foam. —2. the cuttle-fish bone, being

regarded as the froth of the ocean.

—ja a. born in the ocean. (

—jaḥ) 1. the moon. —2. The conch. (

—jau) (dual) N. of the Aśvins. (

—jā) 1. spirituous liquor (produced from the ocean). —2. the

Goddess Lakṣmī.

—jhaṣaḥ a sea-fish.

—dvīpā 1. the earth. —2. a portion of land surrounded by the ocean.

—nagarī N. of Dwaraka, the capital of Kṛṣṇa.

—navanītakaḥ the moon (the butter of the ocean).

—maṁḍūkī the pearl-oyster.

—śayanaḥ N. of Viṣṇu (so called from his resting in the ocean at

the destruction and renovation of the world).

—sāraḥ a gem.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

abdhiḥ puṁ, (āpo jalāni dhīyante’tra, ap + dhā + adhikaraṇe kiḥ,

upapadasamāsaḥ .) samudraḥ . ityamaraḥ ..

अश्व — aśva Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899aśva (2. rarely 3 m. (1. «aś» ifc. f. «ā», a horse, stallion &c.; the, horse

(in the game of chess); the number «seven» (that being the number of

the horses of the sun); the archer (in the zodiac) ; a particular kind of

lover (horse-like in strength) ; N. of a teacher (with the patron. Sāmudri)

; of a son of Citraka 1921; of a Dānava ; («ā») f. (g. «ajādi» q.v.) a mare

‘aspa’; Lat. ‘equus’; Gk. [greek] &c.]

aśva Nom. P. «aśvati», to behave like a horse

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

aśva Uṇ. 1, 150. 1) m. a) «Ross, Pferd», bes. «Hengst» NAIGH. 1, 14. AK.

2, 8, 2, 11. TRIK. 2, 8, 41. H. 1232. MED. v. 3. rathīva kaśayāśvāṁ

abhikṣipan ṚV. 5, 83, 3. indrāya cakruḥ suyujā ye aśvā 4, 33, 10. vṛṣṇo

aśvasya dhārāḥ (AV. 4, 15, 11. 11, 2, 22) 5, 83, 6. aśvaṁ na vājinam (AV.

6, 72, 3) 7, 7, 1. vahamāno aśvaiḥ 10, 11, 7. 107, 7. 119, 3. aśvo vo

? 9, 112, 4. aśvaḥ kanikradadyathā AV. 2, 30, 5. hiraṇyamaśvamuta

gāmajāmavim 6, 71, 1. gauraśvaḥ puruṣaḥ paśuḥ 8, 2, 25. 7, 11. 11, 2, 9.

sthāmnyaśvamatiṣṭhipam 6, 77, 1. ŚAT. BR. 7, 5, 2, 15. 13, 4, 2, 1. 2.

hayo bhūtvā devānavahat vājī gandharvānarvāsurānaśvo manuṣyān 10, 6,

4, 1 = BṚH. ĀR. UP. 1, 1, 2. tato ‘śvaḥ

samabhavadyadaśvattanmedhyamabhūt 1, 2, 7. M. 2, 204. 246. 3, 64.

162. 4, 120. 188. 189. 5, 133. 7, 96. 192. u.s.w. N. 1, 1. 2, 10. u. s. w.

Das «Pferd» ist Opferthier und zwar das vornehmste ṚV. 1, 162, 3. AIT.

BR. 2, 8. 8, 22. ŚAT. BR. 1, 2, 3, 6. 9. 6, 2, 1, 2. Vgl. aśvamedha. Der

Sonnenball wird als ein den Himmel durchlaufendes «Ross» (unter dessen

verschiedenen Namen) vorgestellt, z. B.: sūrādaśvaṁ vasavo nirataṣṭa

ṚV. 1, 163, 2; vgl. ŚAT. BR. 2, 6, 3, 9. 3, 5, 1, 19. 20. 6, 3, 1, 29 und

sonst. aśvavat adv. «wie ein Ross» NIR. 2, 27. KĀTY. ŚR. 22, 8, 24.

aśvaśapha ŚAT. BR. 1, 2, 2, 10. aśvakaśā NIR. 9, 19. aśvahāraka M. 11,

51. aśvacaryā R. 1, 40, 6. aśvānusāra «Begleitung des» (zum Pferdeopfer)

«bestimmten Rosses» MBH. 15, 73—84. LIA. I, 542. aśvalakṣaṇa und

aśvaceṣṭita VARĀH. BṚH. S. 65. 92 in Verz. d. B. H. 248. 249. aśvaratha

«ein mit Rossen bespannter Wagen» ŚAT. BR. 5, 2, 4, 9. AIT. BR. 4, 9.

KĀTY. ŚR. 15, 1, 22. 22, 2, 1. dakṣiṇāśvarathaścaturyuk 5, 10.

aśvarathadāna heisst das 14te Pariśiṣṭa zum AV. Verz. d. B. H. 90.

aśvadūta «ein berittener Bote» LALIT. (Hdschr.) Kap. 15. go’śva n. ŚAT.

BR. 12, 8, 1, 14. 3, 22. aśvakharau KĀTY. ŚR. 16, 3, 10. aśvagardabhājāḥ

2, 4. Am Ende eines adj. comp. f. ā R. 5, 35, 35. AK. 2, 8, 2, 48. H. 748.

pañcāśvā «für fünf Pferde gekauft» P. 4, 1, 22, Sch. Accent eines adj.

comp. auf aśva 6, 2, 107. 108. — b) (wegen der «7 Pferde» der Sonne)

Bezeichnung der «Zahl sieben» ŚRUT. 39. — c) «ein bes. Menschenart»

(puṁjātibheda) MED. v. 3. tasya lakṣaṇam. kāṣṭhatulyavapurdhṛṣṭo

mithyācāraśca nirbhiyaḥ. dvādaśāṅgulameḍhraśca daridrastu hayo

mataḥ.. RATIM. im ŚKDR. — d) N. pr. ein Sohn Citraka’s HARIV. 1921. m.

pl. N. eines Volkes RĀJA-TAR. t. II, p. 311. ein Dānava MBH. 1, 2532. —

2) f. aśvā «Stute» gaṇa ajādi; AK. 2, 8, 2, 14. 3, 4, 231. TRIK. 3, 3, 422.

H. 1233. aśve iva viṣite hāsamāne ṚV. 3, 33, 1. 1, 4. 1, 30, 21. 9, 107, 8.

VS. 37, 12. ŚAT. BR. 5, 5, 4, 35. 14, 1, 3, 25. ĀŚV. ŚR. 12, 6. BṚH. DEV.

in Z. f. vgl. Spr. 1, 442. — Ueber die Etym. s. u. aśan und vgl. NIR. 1, 12.

2, 27.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

aśva 1 I A demon. This was the same demon who later on was born as

Aśoka, King of Kaliṅga. (Chapter 67, Ādi Parva, M.B.).

aśva 2 II A maharṣi. The sage Vaśa is the son of this ṛṣi. (Sūkta 112 of

Ṛgveda).

aśva (Horse). Horses and camels were born, in this world, of Tāmrā,

wife of Kaśyapa, grandson of Brahmā. (Agni Purāṇa, Chapter 19).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

aśva aś + va (see vb. śo).

I. m. A horse, Man. 7, 96.

II. f. vā, A mare, Rājat. 5, 415.

— Comp. an-, m. one who is not a horse, Pañc. iv. d. 49. indriya-, m., plur.

the horse-like organs of sense, Kir. 5, 50. gava-, n. bulls and horses, MBh.

1, 3654. vija-, m. a stallion, Rājat. 5, 280. vṛhadaśva, i. e. vṛ- kant-, m. a

proper name. sa-, adj with horses. saptāśva, i. e. saptan-, m. the sun.

hata- (vb. han), adj. having the horses killed.

— Cf. Lat. equus; [greek] Goth. aihvs.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

aśva m. horse, a man’s name; f. ā mare.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

aśva aś-va, m. horse: ā, f. mare;

-kuṭī, f. stable;

-kuśala, a. skilled in horses;

-kovi-da, a. id.;

-khura, m. horse’s hoof: -vat, ad. like a horse’s hoof;

-ghāma, m. N. of a place;

-ghāsa, m. horse fodder; N.;

-cala-na-śālā, f. riding-hall;

-tama, spv. best horse;

-tara, m., ī, f. mule.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

aśva pu° aśanute vyāpnoti bhārgam aśa—kvan . ghoṭake gacchanta

muccalitacāmaracārumaśvam māghaḥ . jitasiṁhabhayānāgā yatrāśvā

vilayonayaḥ kumā° . amṛtādvāṣpatovahne rvedebhyo’ṇḍācca garbhataḥ .

sāmno hayānāmutpattiḥ saptaghā parikīrtitāḥ

ityuktesteṣāmamṛtādyutpattisthānam .

hayotpattisthānasaṁkhyāsāmyācca 2 saptasaṁkhyāyām

kāṣṭhatulyavapurdhṛṣyo mithyācāraśva nirbhayaḥ .

dvādaśāṅgulameḍhraśca daridrastu hayo mata

ityuktalakṣaṇapuruṣabhede padminī śaśake tuṣṭā haye tuṣṭā ca hastinīti

rasa° . atra prasaṅgāt

aśvānāmaṅgavibhāgaviśeṣasaṁjñālakṣaṇādikamucyate

jayadattakṛtādaśva śāstrāt sārāṁśaḥ atiprasiddhā jihvā tu tasyāḥ śūnā

bhavedadhaḥ . ūrdhaṁ tālu bhavettasyāstato’gre dantapīṭhakam .

tatodantāḥ samuddiṣṭā ūrdhaṁdantā bhavantyadhaḥ . civukaṁ cāghare

bhāge teṣāṁ proktaṁ vicakṣaṇaiḥ . civukasyopariṣṭāttu adharoṣṭhaḥ

prakīrtitaḥ . civukātpārśvabhāge tu hanurnāmābhidhīyate . sṛkvadvayaṁ

vijānīyāt vaktrapārśvagataṁ budhaḥ . uttaroṣṭhaṁ prayāṇākhyaṁ

tadūrdhaṁ protha ucyate nāsācchidretathā pārśveprothasyaiva

vyavasthite . nāsācchidrākṣimadhye tu ghoṇākhyā samudāhṛtā .

ghoṇāpārśvagatau gaṇḍaukṣīrike ca tataḥparam . netrayoruttare bhāge

aśrupāta udāhṛtaḥ . karṇānte caiva netrāntamapāṅgaṁ bruvate budhāḥ .

kanīnikākhyo vijñeyo yaśca nāsāsamīpagaḥ . sitāsitau ca tanmadhye

netrayormaṇḍalaṁ hi tat . pracchādanaṁ bhavedvartma

cākṣikūṭamataḥparam . tasmādūrdhaṁ bhruvorlekhā lalāṭaṁ ca

taduttaram . ūrdhaṁ lalāṭadeśāttu keśāntaṁ ca tataḥ śravaḥ . tataḥ śiro

vijānīyāt śravādūrdhagataṁ budhaḥ . śiraḥpārśvagatau karṇau

tayormūlaṁ sakuntalam . apāṅgāddvyaṅgule caiva śaṅkhaṁ

vidyādvicakṣaṇaḥ . śaṅkṣakarṇāntare caiva kaṭākṣaṁ samudāhṛtam .

vidomarmaviduścaiva karṇasyādhaḥ ṣaḍaṅgule .

ghaṇṭābandhasamīpastho nigālaḥ parikīrtitaḥ . adhastale nigālasya

galamāhurmanīṣiṇaḥ . tataḥ kaṇṭhaṁ vijānīyādadhobhāge nataṁ budhaḥ .

grīvā lokaprasiddhā tu tasyāścopari keśaraḥ . grīvāskandhāntare caiva

vāhaṁ prāhurmanīṣiṇaḥ . vāhasyopari yastu syālkākasaṁ kakudaṁ ca tat

. tataḥ pṛṣṭhaṁ vijānīyādāsanaṁ pṛṣṭhamadhyagam . aṁsake

kakudaścaiva nibandhaḥ parikīrtitaḥ . syātāmaṁsādadhobāhū

tayorbāhyeṣaḍaṅgule . mandiraḥ paścimomāgaḥ kalāpī jānuno’grimaḥ .

jānunaścādhare bhāge jaṅghāṁ vidyādvicakṣaṇaḥ . jaṅghāpārśve kalāṁ

vidyāt sandhyaṁ caiṣikasaṁjñakam . agrataḥ pālihastaḥ syāt paścātkūrca

udāhṛtaḥ . kiṇastatraiva madhyasthohyadhobhāge ca kuṣṭakī .

khurasandhiṁ tatovidyādadhobhāge tataḥ khurama . khurasya pārśve

pārṣṇiḥ syādagrabhāge nakho bhavet . khurasyādhastalaṁ caiva maṇḍukī

talamadhyagā . khuramāṁsaṁ vijānīyāt kṣīrakākhyaṁ vicakṣaṇaḥ .

hṛdayātparataḥ kukṣī pārśvataśca vibhāgataḥ . jaṭharaṁ

pārśvamadhyasthaṁ tasya nābhiśca madhyataḥ . romarājīṁ tato

vidyānmūtrakośamataḥparam . ā kaṭyāḥ paścime bhāge puṭau sphicau ca

kīrtitau . pucchamūlaṁ ca vāhānāṁ bhāṣate pucchamūlataḥ . tasyādhaḥ

kīrtitaḥ pāyuḥ sīvanī ca tataḥ param . muṣkau ca kaṭisandhiṁ ca

tatovidyātparaṁ budhaḥ . adhastātkaṭisandhestu ūrusandhirudāhṛtaḥ .

sakthinī phalasandhestu ūrū pādābhidhāyake . tataḥ sthūraṁ

vijānīyāttasyādhomandiraṁ bhavet . kiṇaṁ caiva tato vidyānmandirākhye

susaṁsthitam . tataḥ paraṁ vijānīyāt kālakūrcaṁ ca kuṣṭikam .

khurāntasaṁjñaṁ maṇḍūkaṁ tato vidyādvicakṣaṇaḥ . agre jaṅghādvayaṁ

caiva vakṣo grīvāśiromukham . pūrvakāyaḥsamaddiṣṭaḥ pṛṣṭhadeśastu

madhyamaḥ . ā kaṭeḥ paścime bhāge khurāntaścāparaṁ smṛtam .

teṣāṁ lakṣaṇāṇi aśubhairlakṣaṇairyuktā hayā na grahaṇocitāḥ . ato

lakṣaṇamevādau teṣāṁ vakṣyāmi dehajam . oṣṭhayoḥ sṛkvaṇoścaiva

jihvāyāṁ daśaneṣu ca . vaktre tāluni nāsāyāṁ gaṇḍayornetrayostathā .

lalāṭe mastake caiva keśe karṇapuṭe tathā . grīvāyāṁ keśare cāpi

skandhe vakṣasi bāhuke . ūṅghāyāṁ jānunoścādhaḥ kūrce pāde tathaiva

ca . pārśvayoḥ pṛṣṭhabhāge ca kukṣau kaṭyāṁ savāladhau . mehane

muṣkayoścāpi tathā caivorukadvaye . āvarte ca khure pucche gatau varṇe

svare tathā . mahādoṣe tyajetprājñaśchāyāyāṁ gandhasatvayoḥ .

pramāṇasyaiva vāhānāṁ lakṣaṇaṁ yatpratiṣṭhitam . śubhāśubhavivekāya

tadvidyādvuddhimānbhiṣak . śālihotrādibhiḥsamyak trikālajñānakovidaiḥ .

ātāmrau pūjitāvoṣṭhau balihīnau mṛdutvacau . suprothottarasaṁsthaṁ ca

viparītaṁ vivarjayet . sṛkvaṇormṛdutā śastā jihvāyāṁ raktatā tathā .

ataścānyaddhi doṣāya na tvadīrghā ca sā śubhā . ghanā snigdhā subadvā

ca samā dantāḥ suśobhanāḥ . ṣaṭsaṁkhye bandhare vṛtte teṣu

vyañjanasaṁbhavaḥ . āyataṁ tuṅgaghoṇaṁ ca nirmāṁsaṁ

priyadarśanam . subandhaṁ pūjitaṁ vaktraṁ viparītaṁ vigarhitam .

tāluraktaṁ praśastaṁ ca supuṭe caiva nāsike . nātitanū samau gaṇḍau

vāhānāṁ kīrtitau śubhau . atyantanirgate caiva subaddhe naiva cāvile .

praśaste vājināṁ netre madyābhe malatārake . srigdhāyate viśāle ca

śreṣṭe madhunibhākṣiṇī . kanakapratisaṁkāśe śaste vāhasya locane .

sāvartaṁ ca viśālaṁ ca animnaṁ caiva vājinaḥ . lalāṭaṁ pūjitaṁ

prāhurmunayaḥ śāstra kovidāḥ . śiraḥ samaṁ tathā

vṛttamāvartadvayabhūṣitam . keśāśca mṛdavaścaiva bahavaścaiva pūjitāḥ

. ṛjutā karṇayoścaiva tīkṣṇatā tanutā tathā . adīrgharomatā caiva

praśastā viprakīrtitā . suvṛttāṅkuñcitāñcaiva dhanyāṁ grīvāṁ bidurbudhāḥ

. keśaraśca jaṭāhīno mṛduścaiva praśasyate . subaddhaśca dṛḍhaścaiva

skandhovāhasya pūjitaḥ . vakṣaḥ praśasta vipulaṁ nirgataṁ viśaraṁ ca

tat . ṛjuvṛkṣasamau bāhūgūḍhaṁ jānu praśasyate . avakrā māṁsahīnā ca

vājijaṅghā praśasyate . śubhaṁ smṛtaṁ suvṛttaṁ ca samaṁ caiva

natonnatam . kūrcamevaṁvidhaṁ vidyādgranthivraṇavivarjitam .

dṛḍhamaṇḍakikāyukto vartulaḥ śliṣṭasandhikaḥ . khuraḥ kharakhurākāraḥ

praśastaḥ sasudāhṛtaḥ . pārśve caiva same vṛtte ūrdhvamāṁsopaśībhite .

avilambi suvṛttaṁ ca udaraṁ cātipūjitam . nātidīrghaṁ samaṁ pṛṣṭhaṁ

kiñcicca vinataṁ śubham . suvṛttā caiva pīnā ca kaṭirdhanyā prakīrti tā .

mṛdusnigdhāyatairyuktaṁ bālaiḥ pracchaṁ praśasyate . vṛṣaṇau ca

samau vṛttau īṣallambāvalomaśau . kṛṣṇavarṇavihīnaṁ tu hrasvaṁ

mehanamiṣyate . anupūrvaṁ paraṁ caiva śobhanaṁ corukadvayam .

pūrvajaṅghe ca jaṅghādi khurāntaṁ cāpi paścimam . śālihotrādibhiḥ

prīktaṁ munibhiḥ pūrvavedibhiḥ .

āvartalakṣaṇam viṁśatistu śubhāḥ proktāḥ ṣaṭsaptatyaśubhāḥ smṛtāḥ

. uttaroṣṭhaprapāṇasthāstatrāvartāḥ śubhāvahāḥ . sṛkvaṇośca thā

proktāḥ sarvakāmaphalapradāḥ . trayaścaivātha catvāro vājinoryasya

romajāḥ . dvau vā lalāṭajau yasya sa tu dhanyatamaḥ smṛtaḥ . ānupūrbyā

sthitāścordhvaṁ lalāṭe romajāstraṁyaḥ . niḥśreṇī nāma sā khyātā

bhartuḥ sarvārthasādhinī . śiraḥkeśāntayormadhye śravonāmābhidhīyate .

tatrāvartaḥ sthito’śvasya bharturjayavivardhanaḥ .

ghaṇṭābandhasamīpastho nigālaḥ kīrtitoṁ budhaiḥ .

tasmindevasaṇirnāma romajaḥ śubhakṛt smṛtaḥ . karṇamūle tathā bāhvoḥ

keśānte mastake tathā . āvattoḥ pūjitā nitpa viśeṣeṇa tu mastake .

āvartā yasya catvāro vājino vakṣasi sthitāḥ . ekā kaṇṭhe bhavet spaṣṭaṁ

sa dhanyaḥ sarvakāmadaḥ . randhre caiva sadā bhartuḥ

śaṁsitārthapradomataḥ . uparandhrodbhavaścaiva romajaścāti pūjitaḥ .

śaṅkhacakragadāpadmaśuktivajropamāśca ye . viśeṣeṇa śubhāḥ proktā

romajāḥ śubhadeśajāḥ . ata ūrdhvaṁ pravakṣyāmi romajānaśubhāya yān

. bhartuḥ kleśavahān sarbāndhanaprāṇāpahārakān .

nāsikāpuṭayormadhye pradeśaḥ protha ucyate . tatra bharturvināśāya

romajo’śvastha kīrtitaḥ . ūrdhvastho nāsikācchidrāt svāminaḥ

kleśadāyakaḥ . gaṇḍajaścaiva bhartāraṁ hantyāvarto durāsadaḥ .

aśrupātaḥ samuddiṣṭaḥ pradeśaścakṣuṣoradhaḥ . tatrāvartībhaveddhīnaḥ

svāminaḥ kulanāśanaḥ . apāṅgāddvyaṅgule caiva pradeśaḥ śaṅkha ucyate

. tatra bharturvināśāya bhavedvāhasya romajaḥ . bhruvo deśe

samudbhūta āvarto naiva pūjitaḥ .

suhṛdviyogakṛtsasyādbharturarthāvasādakaḥ . savyāṁ grīvāṁ śirāṁ

vidyāttatrāvartastu kutsitaḥ . kakṣayoścāpi saṁgrāme svāminaṁ cāśu

ghātayet . civukasya samīpastho vāmadakṣiṇabhāgataḥ . pradeśastu

hanurnāma tatrāvarto hi dāruṇaḥ . adharoṣṭhasya cādhastu civuko hi

prasiddhakaḥ . tasmin pāpo bhavedbhartuḥ karṇayoścāpi romajaḥ .

kaṇṭhasyātha nigālasya madhye vālaka ucyate . tatrāvartaḥ sthitaḥ pāpaḥ

skandhasandhigataśca yaḥ . adhastājjvaṅghayoścaiva granthiḥ kūrca iti

smṛtaḥ . tatrāvartaḥ smṛto bhartuḥ saṁgrāme jīvitāntakṛt .

kūrcādaṣṭāṅgulaṁ cordhvaṁ pārśvayoḥ kakatā smṛtā . tatra bhartuḥ

śarāghātai rjīvitāntāya romaja . kakudaṁ vṛṣabhasyeva

suvyaktamupalakṣyate . vājino yasya tatrastha āvartastu vināśakṛt .

kakudasya purobhāge samīpe vāha ucyate . bhartuḥ sutasametasya

tasmin nāśāya romajāḥ . kākase tu hayasya syādāvartoṁ yasya dāruṇaḥ .

raṇe hataḥ samaṁ bhartrā kṛvyādaiḥ sa vilupyate . kroḍe caivāsane cāpi

hṛdaye rcava vājinaḥ . āvartāḥ svāmighātāya bhavantye te na saṁśayaḥ .

pārśvayoromajo yasya sa cāśvonayati kṣayam . sapakṣaṁ cāśu

bhartāraṁ nīhārāmbu yathāmbujam . kūrcasyādhaḥpradeśastu kuṣṭiśca

parikīrtitaḥ . adhanyastatra vāhasya jaghanyo jānujaśca yaḥ .

nābhijomuṣkajaścaiva trikajaśca viśeṣataḥ . pucchamūlasthitaścāpi naiva

dhanyaḥ prakīrtitaḥ . kukṣau vyādhiḥ, kṣayāyeva romajāḥ kukṣisaṁbhavāḥ

. pāyutribalimadhyasthā naiva dhanyā prakīrtitāḥ . sphicijaḥ khurajaścaiva

yasyāvarto hi vājinaḥ . lañjāvartaḥ sa vikhyāto bhartuḥ sarvārthanāśakaḥ

. śatapādīti vikhyātastathā vai mukulo’paraḥ . āvartaścaiva saṁghātaḥ

pādukaścārdhapādukraḥ . śuktiścaivāvalīḍhaśca āvartaḥ kīrtito’ṣṭadhā .

vājidehagataḥ samyak śubhāśubhanivedakaḥ . śatapādīsamākāraḥ

śatapādīti kīrtitaḥ . jātīmukulasaṁkāśo mukulaḥ samudāhṛtaḥ . āvarto

bhramito bālaiḥ saṁghāto romapuñjakaḥ . śuktiśca

śuktisaṁsthānairomabhirvyaktalakṣaṇaiḥ . eteṣāmeva līḍhastu avalīḍhaḥ

prakī rtitaḥ . pādukaḥ pādukākārastathācaivārdhapādukaḥ .

bālairviśeṣasaṁsthānairnirdiśenmatimānbhiṣak . śāstramārgānusāreṇa

yathā proktaṁ tapodhanaiḥ eteṣāmeva sarveṣāmāvartānāṁ vicakṣaṇaiḥ .

romṇāṁ tilakṛtā saṁjñā vājilakṣaṇavedibhiḥ . śubhāśubhau tu yatra dvau

tatraiko na phalapradaḥ . evaṁ hemnā dahetpāpaṁ tena doṣo na duṣyati

. atha vā vājino mukhyāḥ ye cāṅgādiguṇādhikāḥ . dattvā grāhyāḥ

krayeṇaiva durāvartastu kākūdī . śrīvṛkṣo romajaścaiva

rocamānastathaiva ca . aṅgādī peṣalī nāma rājaratnapradāḥ sadā .

prayāṇe mārutaṁ vidyāllalāṭe ca hutāśanam . urasi cāśvinau devau

candrāsūryau ca mūrdhani . randhre skandaviśākhau ca uparandhre

harīharau . ityevaṁ pūjitāhye te daśabandhāstu vājinaḥ . apyekena vihīnā

ye bhaveyuraśubhāstadā .

atha puṇḍralakṣaṇam ata ūrdhvaṁ pravakṣyāmi puṇḍrāṇāṁ lakṣaṇam

śubham . śuktiśaṅkhagadāpadmakhaḍgacakrāṅguśopamāḥ . śirolalāṭaṁ

vadanaṁ yaḥ puṇḍro vyāpya tiṣṭhati . sa dhanyaḥ pūjitonityaṁ

mṛdukaścaiva yobhavet . parvatendupatākābhā ye ca sragdāmasannibhāḥ

. te sarve pūjitāḥ puṇḍrā dhanadhānyaphalapradāḥ . iti puṇḍrāḥ

samākhyātāḥ pūrvaśāstrānusārataḥ . aśubhāṁścaiva vakṣyāmi—

yathāyīgaṁ samāsataḥ . kākakaṅkakabandhāhigṛghragomāyusannibhāḥ .

asitāḥ pītakā raktāḥ puṇḍrakā na ca pūjitāḥ . tiryagagāścaiva vicchinnāḥ

śṛṅlalāpāśaśobhitāḥ . jihvākṛṣṇākṣirūkṣāṇi bhasmavarṇanibhāni ca .

śūlāgrā vāmadehasthāḥ puṇḍrakā na śubhapradāḥ . puṇḍrakāṇi

vinaśyanyi bhinnavarṇāni vājinaḥ .

atha puṣpalakṣaṇam . āgataṁ vatsarantasya ye

bhavantyanyavarṇakāḥ . vindavaḥ puṣpasaṁjñā vā hitāhitatvakārakāḥ .

teṣāṁ pradeśabhede ca lakṣaṇaṁ yadvyavasthitam . tattathaiva

samāsena vispaṣṭaṁ kīrtyate’dhunā . prapāṇe ca lalāṭe ca kace mūrdhani

karṇayoḥ . nigāle caiva keśānte puṣpaṁ dhanyatamaṁ smṛtam . skandhe

vakṣasi kakṣe ca muṣkayorbāhuke mukhe . hanau pṛṣṭhe ca vāhānāṁ

puṣpaṁ svāmihitapradam . nābhau keśe tathā kaṇṭhe dante caiva hi

vājinām . puṣpaṁ dhanyatamaṁ proktaṁ bhartuḥ sarvārthasādhakam .

apraśastāni dṛṣṭāni munibhiryāni śāstrataḥ . tāni samyak pravakṣyāmi

puṣpāṇyanyāni darśanāt . adharoṣṭhe kare prothe uttaroṣṭhe tathaiva ca .

ghoṇāyāṁ gaṇḍayoścaiva śaṅkhayośca tathā bhruvoḥ . grīvāyāṁ caiva

vāhe ca sṛkkaṇoḥsthūrake sthici . pāyau kroḍe ca puṣpāṇi ninditānīti

niścayaḥ . raktaṁ pītaṁ tathā kṛṣṇaṁ puṣpaṁ sarvatra neṣyate .

śubhapradeśe sañjātaṁ bhavetsādhāraṇaṁ tataḥ .

putralābhadhanaprāptimārogyaṁ vijayaṁ tathā . vidyātpuṣpaiḥ

śubhairbharturaśubhaiśca viparyayam . sarvāṅgapuṣpito vāho parityājyo

na saṁśayaḥ .

atha gatiśubhādilakṣaṇam dūramutkṣipya yaḥ pārdāstaptāṁgārān

spṛśanniva . pulaṁ yāti śubhaṁ hṛṣṭo vājī bhadragatistusaḥ . pūjitā

vṛṣamātaṅgasi haśārdūlagāminaḥ . ato’nyagatayo neṣṭāḥ

marvaśuddhaturaṅkamāḥ . saṁkīrṇā ekatobhraṣṭā caṅkramaudha

vivarjitāḥ . atyūrdhā caiva vakrā ca vājināṁ ninditā gatiḥ .

ṣoḍaśāchoṭikābhistu karaveṣṭitajānubhiḥ . śataṁ dviguṇitaṁ gatvā

hastānāṁ punareti yaḥ . sa śīghragatirityukto vājī dhanyastapodhanaiḥ .

daśahīnā bhavantyete madhyamādhamagā hayāḥ .

atha varṇabhedena nāmabhedaḥ śvetaḥ kokāha ityuktaḥ kṛṣṇaḥ khuga

ha ucyate . pītako haritaḥ proktaḥ kaṣāyo raktakaḥ smṛtaḥ .

pakkatālanibho vājī kayāhaḥ parikīrtitaḥ . pīyūṣavarṇaḥ serāho

gardabhābhaḥ surūhakaḥ . nīlo nīlaka evāśvaḥ tripūhaḥ kapilaḥ smṛtaḥ .

śilahaḥ kapiśo vājī pāṇḍukeśaḥ subāladhiḥ . halāhaścitrakaścatripulāhaḥ

śvetapītakaḥ . īṣatpītaḥ kulāhastu yo bhavet kṛṣṇajānukaḥ . kṛṣṇā cāsye

bhavedrekhā pṛṣṭhavaṁśānugāminī . urāhaḥ kṛṣṇajānustu

manākpāṇḍustu yo bhavet . veruhāṇaḥ smṛto vājī pāṭalo yaḥ prakīrtitaḥ .

raktapītakaṣāyottho varṇajo yasya dṛśyate . dukulāhaḥsa vikhyāto varṇo

vāhasya dehajaḥ . pūṁrvoktānāṁ ca varṇānāṁ mukhapuṇḍreṇa vājinām .

ye bhavanti pare bhedāstān bravīmyanupurvagaḥ . kokāhaḥ puṇḍriko

nākhaḥ kokurāhaḥ prakīrtitaḥ . khurāhakharagāhau ca harikoharirāhikaḥ .

kalāhaścaiva vollāhaḥ sirāhaḥ sihurāhakaḥ . kulāhaḥ kulurāhastu sarāhaḥ

śubharāhakaḥ . cārurāho jayedaśvo vorurāho na yaḥ smṛtaḥ . kulīhī

duruṇāhastu yuddhake naiva kortitaḥ . tripuhastripukṣāhaśca yuddhake

naivakīrtitaḥ . tripuhastripulāhaśca citralāṅgaśca yo bhavet .

atha romavarṇabhedena śubhāśrubhalakṣaṇam . yasya gaurāṇi pītāni

gātraromāṇi vājinaḥ . sa bhartuḥ śrivamādhatte yasya śuklāsitāni ca .

yasya pādāḥ sitāḥ sarve pucchaṁ vakṣo mukhaṁ tathā . ūrdhvajaṅghā

sitā yasya ta vidyādaṣṭamaṅgalam . prabhūtāsitatārāśca praśastā

munibhiḥ smṛtāḥ . yastu pītāsitaistāraiḥ sa ghanyaḥ kīrtito hayaḥ .

praśastaḥ kṛṣṇatārastu mallikākṣaḥ prakīrtitaḥ . śvetajāveṣṭitaṁ kṛṣṇa

rekhayā tārakaṁ ca yat . mallikākṣaḥ savijñeyaḥ svāminaḥ

sukhavardhanaḥ . sitatayā’praśastaśca svāminaḥ kleśavardhanaḥ .

sarvaśvetaśca kṛṣṇaśca raktapītastathaiva ca . ete sāṁgrāmikāḥ

proktāsturagā munisattamaiḥ . haritāḥ kila jāyante vājinaḥ

puṇyadarśanāḥ . yato hitā narendrāṇāmāyurāro gyaśrīpradāḥ .

raktāsyamehanaḥ śastaḥ śyāmakarṇastu yaḥ sitaḥ . kapotena ca varṇena

yohayaḥ śuklakeśaraḥ . śuklapādamukho vājī praśastaḥ parikīrtitaḥ .

caturṇāṁ caiva pādānāṁ śuklatā yasya vājinaḥ . mukhaṁ sitataraṁ caiva

pañcabhadraḥ sa ucyate . śvetamaṇḍalacitraśca bhartuḥ

sarvārthasādhakaḥ . pāṇḍurā yasya rekhā syāt pṛṣṭhavaṁśānugāminī

śvetakṛṣṇaśirā yaśca naiva dhanyaḥ prakīrtitaḥ . anyavarṇaṁ śiro yasya

puccha vā yasya vājinaḥ . pucchena śirasā vāpi nānāvarṇena ninditaḥ .

avyaktavarṇo yovāhastathā tittirisannibhaḥ . kutsito vānarākṣaśca yīvā

vyāghrāvalīḍhakaḥ

tathāṅgavikṛtito’śubhalakṣaṇam . kākudī kṛṣṇajihvaśca

kṛṣṇasephāṇḍatālukaḥ karālī hīnadantaśca śṛṅgī vādhikadantakaḥ .

ekāṇḍaścaiva jātāṇḍaḥ kañcukī trisarī tathā . mārjārapādo

vyāghrābhastrikaṁrṇī dvikhurī stanī . yamayo vāmanaścaiva

kākatittirasaṁnibhaḥ . vānarākṣo viḍālākṣo muśalī cendravṛddhikaḥ .

yeṣāṁ pṛṣṭhe hato bhartā’ jātadantastathaiva ca . ete doṣānvitā

vāhāstyājyā vai bhūtimicchatā . dhanaprāṇaharāhyete

bandhuvigrahakārakāḥ . eṣāṁ cihnaṁ pravakṣyāmi yena jānanti sādinaḥ .

pūrbaśāstrānusāreṇa munīnāṁ vacanaṁ yathā . āvartā yatra kakude

kākudī sa udāhṛtaḥ . karālairvādhare dantairjāyate yasya cottaram

caturbhiḥ pañcabhiścaiva hīnadantaḥ prakīrtitlaḥ .

saptamiścāṣṭabhirdantai rjātaścādhikadantakaḥ .

aṅguṣṭhaparvasaṁkāśaṁ chāgaśṛṅgopamantathā . jambūvadararūpaṁ ca

tathā cāmalakopamam . āmrāsthisadṛśaṁ cāpi harītakyāḥ phalopamam .

dagdhacarmanibhaṁ cāpi bālaṁ saṁsthānameva ca . kālaṅkarṇāntare

yasya keśānte cāpi dṛśyate . dhoreyaḥ sarvapāpānāṁ vāhaḥ śṛṅgī sa

kīrtitaḥ . evaṁvidhena śṛṅgeṇa śṛṅgī rāṣṭre na vāsayet .

ekatolapramāṇena muṣkeṇaikāṇḍasaṁjñakaḥ . atyantaromaśābhyāṁ tu

tābhyāṁ jātāṇḍa ucyate . skandhe vakṣasi bāhvośca aṁsadeśe tathaiva

ca . anya varṇo bhavedvājī kañcukī sa prakīrtitaḥ . yasyānyavarṇā rekhā

syātpāde kūrce ca vājinaḥ . mārjārapādaḥ prokto’sau so’dhanyaḥ

kulanāśanaḥ . anyavarṇasya vāhasya śiraḥ kṛṣṇaṁ yadā bhavet . trisarī

nāma sa prokto bhartuḥ kulavināśanaḥ . dvikhuraṁ

gokhurākārakhurairvidyādvicakṣaṇaḥ . atha vā tribaliyuktai

rnimnamadhyaiśca nirdiśet . vṛṣaṇābhyāṁ sujātābhyāṁ stanābhyāṁ

vihitā stanī . tribhiḥ karṇaistrikarṇī ca vyāghrābho vyāghravarṇakaḥ .

ekenāṅgena hīnena nimnena ca viśeṣataḥ . yamayaṁ vājinaṁ

vidyādvāmanaṁ vāmanākṛtim . varṇādekena pādena anyavarṇena yī

hayaḥ . musalīti sa vikhyāto bhartuḥ kulavināśanaḥ . virodhaṁ naiva yo

yāti dṛṣṭvāśvān muṣkavarjitaḥ . indravṛddhiḥ sa vikhyāto bhartuḥ

kulavināśanaḥ . atha cedbaḍavāṁ dṛṣṭvā virodhamadhigacchati . nigūḍha

vṛṣaṇākhyastu sa dhanyaḥ sarvakāmadaḥ . dvivarṣaṁ tu samārabhya

yāvadvā pañcavārṣikaḥ . dantānāṁ muṣakayoścaiva sambhavo vājinaḥ

smṛtaḥ . ata ūrdhvaṁ na jāyante muṣkau dantāśca vājinaḥ . aśubhaṁ tu

phalaṁ vācyamabhāve na tatastathā .

athāśvāṅgaceṣṭādiśubhāśubham . ataḥparaṁ pravakṣyāmi turagāṇāṁ

vibhāgataḥ jvalitena yathāṅgena phalaṁ vācyaṁ śubhāśubham . yadā

jvalati vāhānāṁ sarvagātre hutāśanaḥ . tadā vidyādanāvṛṣṭimavdamekaṁ

na saṁśayaḥ . antaḥpuravināśastu mehanejvalite bhavet . udare

vittanāśastu pāyau pucche parājayaḥ . uttamāṅge ca vaktre ca skandhe

caivāsane tathā . bharturjayāya vāhānāṁ jvalanaṁ yatra netrake .

dhūmaṁ lalāṭe bāhvośca tathā vakṣasi ninditam . tatraiva jvalanaṁ

śastaṁ tathā nāsāsamudbhavaḥ . yadā vyādhiṁ vinā vājī grāsaṁ tyajati

durmanāḥ . aśrupātaṁ ca kurute tadā bharturaśobhanam . svayameva

yadā vaktraṁ hṛṣṭo lokayate hayaḥ . ravaṅkāyapradāne tu tadā

vidyājjayaṁ prabhoḥ . sarvaideva śiroghnastu sarveṣāṁ naiva pūjitaḥ .

vāmapādābhighātastu prabhīryātrāniṣedhakaḥ . svāminārūḍhamātreṇa

dakṣiṇaṁ pārśvamātmanaḥ . turaṅgamo yadā nyasyettadā bharturjayo

bhavet . pucchaṁ vāhaṁ yadā vāho vāmato vikiredyadā . tadā bhartuḥ

pravāsaḥ syāt dakṣiṇe vijayastayā . prakiranti yadātyarthaṁ sarva

pucchvaṁ turaṅgamāḥ . akasmādeva jātā ca teṣāṁ bhītiḥ prabhoḥsmṛtā .

athāśvamānam hasto’ṅgulānāṁ viṁśatyā caturuttarayā smṛtaḥ .

caturhastastu vikhyātaḥ śāstroktenottamo hayaḥ . ardhahastena hīnastu

bhavenmadhyasturaṅgamaḥ . muṣṭinyūnena hastena hīnaścāpyadhamaḥ

smṛtaḥ . ūrdhvamānapramāṇaṁ tu pariṇāhaṁ vinirdiśet . uttamānāñca

madhyānāṁ honānāṁ caiva vājinām . ardhasaptamahastaṁ tu śreṣṭhaṁ

dairvyeṇa nirdiśet . ṣaḍbhiśca muṣṭibhihīrnaṁ madhyamaṁ ca vicakṣaṇaḥ

. pañcahastapramāṇastu jaghanyaḥ samudāhṛtaḥ . dvātriṁśadaṅgulaṁ

vaktramuttamāśvasya kīrtitam . pṛṣṭhaṁ vakṣaḥ kaṭīṁ caiva

mukhatulyaṁ samādiśet . aṅgulīdvayahīnaṁ tu mukhādi

madhyamādhamam . nirdiśenmatimānvaidyaḥ vājiśāstraviśāradaḥ .

saptāṅgulaṁ khuraṁ caiva uttamāśvasya kīrtitam . ṣaḍaṅgulaṁ

bhavenmadhyejaghanye caturaṅgulam . ṣoḍaśāṅguladīrghā tu jaṅghā

caivottame haye . caturdaśāṅgulā madhye hīne ca dvādaśāṅgulā .

evaṁvidhaṁ pramāṇaṁ tu nirdiṣṭaṁ śāstraśālibhiḥ . apāṅgāt

pucchamūlaṁ tu dairvyeṇāśvaṁ pramāṇayet . khurāntāt kakudaṁ

yāvadūrdhamānena buddhimān . vakṣobhāge tu sarbebhyo rajjvā vā

sūtrakeṇa ca . pariṇāhaṁ turaṅgasya māpayenmatimānbhiṣak . evaṁ

pramāṇabhāgena vibhaktāṅgaśca pūjitaḥ . ato hīnādhikāṅgāśca harayo

naiva pūjitāḥ . āvartādikaṁ viśeṣayati hemā° pa° kha° jyoti°

parāśarasaṁhitā . āvarto bahirmukhavṛttamaṇḍalaromā,

dīrghavṛttārdharomā śuktiḥ . kanakamantarmukhavṛttaromasaṁghātaṁ,

praphullavikacaroma puṣparamiti . puṣpaṁ viśeṣayati tatraiva . śvetaṁ

snigdhamanyavarṇastha praśastaṁśvetasya kṛṣṇaṁ pītaṁ rūkṣaṁraktaṁ

vā . yasyānyavarṇaṁ lalāṭe śvetaṁ bālendutārakasaṁsthānaṁ vā

puṣpam .

ayāśvāyurlakṣaṇam āyurlakṣaṇamaśvānāmataūrdhvaṁ pravakṣyate .

śālihotrādinirdiṣṭaṁ yathā pūrbaṁ tapodhanaiḥ . susaṁhatāśca ye vāhā

hrasvakarṇāstathaiva ca . svaranetrasvabhāveṣu na dīnāścirajīvinaḥ .

mahāghoṇā mahākāyāye cāśvāḥ pṛthuvakṣasaḥ . teṣāṁ dīrghaṁ

bhavedāyuḥ snigdhāṅgāścaiva ye sadā . karṇāgre pīḍite yeṣāṁ

sindūrābhasya darśanam . śoṇitasya bhavet kṣipraṁ te matāścirajīvinaḥ .

na viṣkiranti ye bālaṁ khapāsāya turaṅgamāḥ . na vā jighranti ye cāpi

te’pi dīrghāyuṣo matāḥ . kuṣṭikānāṁ kiṇā yeṣāṁ dṛśyante vājināṁ

sphuṭāḥ . pratisrotaḥ piba ntyambho ye ca te dīrghajīvinaḥ .

padmapatradalākāraṁ jihvāgraṁ yadi vājinaḥ . dantāśca mauktikākārā

liṅgaṁ yeṣāṁ ca nirmalam . sītkāraṁ ca bhavedyeṣāṁ lāṅgūle cālanaṁ

punaḥ . prasvedaḥ śubhagandhastu nakhā vā darpaṇopamāḥ . yeṣāṁ ca

dṛḍharomāṇi te sarve cirajīvinaḥ . snigdhā gambhīradīrghāśca prothagā

yasya vājinaḥ . bhavanti vipulā rekhāstaṁ vidyāddīrghajīvinam .

chatracāmaraśṛṅgārakhaḍgaśaṅkhāṅguśānibhāḥ . śuktivajragadākārā

dhvajapadmasamopamāḥ . śrīvṛkṣasvastikābhāsāḥ

protharekhāścirāyuṣām . ūrdhvaṁ prothotthitā rekhā yasyavāmena

cānatā . hrasvā vā yasya vāhasya na ciraṁ tasya jīvitam . ūrdhvaṁ

prothasamā rekhā dṛśyate yasya vājinaḥ . tasya mṛtyuḥ samuddiṣṭo

daśamaṁ prāpya vatsaram . tryaṅgulā ced daśa dve ca varṣāṇāṁ tasya

jīvitam . trayodaśāvdaṁ sa jīvedyasyāsye caturaṅgule . tiryagge cordhage

syātāṁ dve rekhe caiva vājinaḥ . prothage vātha vāhasya tasya

vidyāccaturdaśa . dakṣiṇena ca pārśvena yaḥ śete sarvadā hayaḥ .

bahumūtro’lpamūtraśca ciraṁ jīvati no hayaḥ . vinataḥ pūrbakāyena

sthūlajānuśca yohayaḥ . śūnākṣikūṭastabdhākṣaḥ svalpāyuḥ sa prakīrtitaḥ

. jātandantadvayaṁ bālye patatyavde tṛtīyake . caturo daśanān

vidyāccaturthe patitotthitān . pañcame patitodbhūtān ṣaṭ ca dantān

manīṣiṇaḥ . ṣaṣṭhāvdeṣu ca varṣeṣu kālikādisamudbhavaḥ . kālikā hariṇī

śuklā kṛṣṇā kācā samakṣikā . śaṅkhā caiva krameṇāśvavayasaḥ

parisūcikāḥ . vaktrānte kālikā rekhā kṛṣṇā dantāgrasaṁsthitā . ṣaṣṭhe ca

saptame varṣe cāṣṭame ca bhavet kramāt . āpītā hariṇī jñeyā kālikā

sthānamāśritā . navame daśame varṣe bhavedekādaśe tathā . kṛṣṇā caiva

bhavecchuktā dante mūrdhni samudbhavā . dvādaśāvdaṁ samārabhya

bhavedyāvaccaturdaśam . sitā siddhārthakākārā kāceti parikīrtitā .

pañcadaśāvdamārabhya yāvatsaptadaśāditaḥ . makṣikā makṣikāṁkārā

bhavedaṣṭādaśādiṣu . viṁśatyanteṣu varṣeṣu vājināṁ daśanodbhavā .

trayoviṁśāvasāneṣu ekaviṁśādiṣu triṣu . śaṅkhākārā bhavecchaṅkhā

prayuktasthānamāśritā . chidraṁ ca calanaṁ caiva tathā pātaśca ṣaṣṭitaḥ

. atibaddhāḥ kaṣāyāśca tanavaśceti tattrayaḥ . te bhavanti dvivarṣasya

yuktāścaiva dvijanmanā . īṣacca śirasaḥ sūkṣmā bhavecca patitotthitā .

khallāgrā vipulā dantā bhavanti patitotthitāḥ . khallabhāge vināpūrṇe

vyañjanānāṁ na sambhavaḥ . pūrṇeṣu khallabhāgeṣu jāyante kālikādayaḥ

. nimnaṁ kṛṣṇaṁ ca dantāgraṁ khallamityabhi dhīyate . pūrṇatāṁ cāsya

jānīyāt ṣaṣṭhaprabhṛtivatsare . khalleṣu kālikā»yāti naiva kāryā vicāraṇā .

niyatā kālikā rekhā supūrṇe dantamastake . dvayorbhavati ṣaṣṭhe dve

caturṇāṁ saptame tathā . khallamaṣṭasu varṣeṣu dantānāṁ kālikā

kramāt . kālikānukrameṇaiva hariṇyādiṣu buddhimān . dvau dvau varṣeṇa

jānīyādvājināṁ vyañjanaṁ prati . deśabhedajāśvalakṣma aśvānāṁ

janmadeśāṁstu pravakṣyāmyanupūrvaśaḥ . uttamānāṁ ca madhyānāṁ

hīnānāṁ caiva saṁmatān . uttamāstvadhikāḥ proktāstathāpārasikāśca ye

. koṅkaṇāścaiva ye vāhā pṛṣṭhajā ye ca kīrtitāḥ . uraujātāśca kīrāśca

turuṣkā māṇḍavāśca ye . pārbatāḥ saindhavā madhyā stathā sārasvatā

hayāḥ . saṁbhalāścāṣṭalāścaiva jaṭādeśodbhavāśca ye .

adhamāṣṭaṅkaṇaiḥ sārdhaṁye ca prāgdakṣiṇodbhavāḥ .

vṛttadīrghāñcitagrīvāhrasvakarṇā mahāhayāḥ . mahākāyā mahoraskā

nistrāsāste’dhikā matāḥ . atyantaṁ vinataṁ yeṣāṁ nirmāsaṁ ca mukhaṁ

bhavet . pīnena kaṭideśena mukharāśca bhavanti te . adhvanyāśca

mahāsārāḥ saṁgrāme caiva pūjitāḥ . api śastrahatāṅgaśca naiva muñcati

sādinam . pārasīko’dhikastasmāt koṅkaṇāḥ kiñcidūnakāḥ . sthūlāḥ

sthūlaśārīrāśca prasthāne dīrghapṛṣṭhakāḥ . koṅkaṇadeśajātānāṁ

madhyamānāṁ ca vājinām . nādhikaiḥ sadṛśaṁ vaktraṁ bāhulyena

vinirdeśet . suvṛttadehatīkṣṇaśca svapramāṇena madhyamaḥ . urujātaḥ

samuddiṣṭaḥ kiñcitsthūlo manāgjavaḥ . atisthūlo’titīkṣṇaśca

hrasvagrīvorukastathā . turuṣkaḥ kīrtito vājī sthūlavakramukhaśca yaḥ .

koṅkaṇākāradehastu bhavenmāṇḍaviko hayaḥ . śāntyā caiva prasāṇena

kevalaṁ naiva tatsamaḥ . sibdhudeśodbhavo vājī pṛṣṭhajaścārukorukaḥ .

ānanaṁ cāpi dīrghaṁ ca tasya pṛṣṭhaṁ prakīrtitam . śāntyā caiva

javenāpi raṇaśūrastvayaṁmataḥ . sādibhaktyecchayā

yātitājikādadhikastathā . parimaṇḍaladehāstu tīkṣṇakarṇamukhā hayāḥ .

pṛṣṭhadeśodbhavā dṛṣṭāstathā sārasvatāśca ye . lambakarṇa jaṭaścaiva

āṣṭalaḥ parikīrtitaḥ . sambhalaḥ śliṣṭajānuśca padā paścādbalopamaḥ .

vartulāścāpi hrasvāśca ṭaṅkaṇāḥ parikīrtitāḥ . dākṣiṇātyo bhavetkuṇṭho

yo’dhanyaḥ sarvavājinām . javahīnā mahāduṣṭā pūrbadeśasamudbhavāḥ .

vājivaddeśa jānāṁca veśaṁ vidyādvicakṣaṇaḥ .

athāśvānāṁ viprādijātiḥ sāmyena jāyate jāti rjātirūpeṇa vāhayet .

sāma pradānaṁ daṇḍaṁ ca trividhaṁ viniyojayet . trāsī lubdhodayāluśca

vipraḥ sa parikīrtitaḥ . śūraśca dṛḍhamanyuśca kṣatriyasturagaḥ smṛtaḥ .

pāpinaḥ kalparūpāśca duṣṭāḥ vaiśyāḥ prakīrntitāḥ . virūpā viṣamāścaiva

śūdrāścaṇḍā udāhṛtāḥ . brāhmaṇān śaktidānena sāmnā caiva tu kṣatriyān

. vaiśyān daṇḍena śabdena śūdrān daṇḍena vāhayet .

atha bhadrajātyādi hemā° pa° kha° . yuddhe’dhvani tathāgtau ca

samaḥ pīḍāṁ niyacchati . yovā vrajati śīghraṁca yena kenacidāsitaḥ .

dhṛtiṁ gacchati sarvatra bhadrajātisturaṅgabhaḥ . maṅgalyo

lakṣaṇairyuktaḥ kiñcittveva vigarhitaḥ . śīghraṁ gṛhṇāti śikṣāṁ ca

kṣipraṁ ca pratimuñcati 1 . rātrau svapiti na

tathāhnyupaviṣṭasturaṅgamaḥ . turaṅgamāṇāṁ krodhīva kāmī cerṣālureva

ca . ādau śūrastataḥ paścādbhītatvamupagacchati . na kenāpi prakāreṇa

ciraṁ pālayate tu yaḥ . evavivastu vijñeyo mandajātisturaṅgamaḥ 2 . īrṣyī

bhītastathā trāsī tathā sarvatra śaṅkitaḥ . prasārya gātraṁ sakalaṁ divā

vā yadi vā niśi . satataṁ jātanidro’nyān vādhate ca turaṅgamān . na ca

vetti prakarāṁśca mnāniṁ śīghraṁ ca gacchati . na ca tuṣṭiṁ samāpnoti

mṛgajātisturaṅgamaḥ 3 . miśrairguṇaiḥ syānmiśrākhyastathaiva baḍavā

guṇaiḥ 4 . bhadraḥ śreṣṭhohayojñeyo jātireṣātu vājinām .

miśromiśrādhikojñeyoguṇadoṣaiḥ samāsataḥ . varṇabhedena anyā api

saṁjñāḥ śālihotre darśitā vistarabhayānnoktāstataevāvaseyāḥ .

vṛhatsaṁhitāyāṁ lakṣaṇādi samāsenoktam

dīrghagrīvākṣikūṭastrikahṛdayapṛthustāmratālvoṣṭhajihvaḥ

sūkṣmatvakkeśabālaḥ suśaphagatimukho hrasvakarṇoṣṭhapucchaḥ .

jaṅghājānūruvṛttaḥ samasitadaśanaścārusaṁsthānarūpo vājī sa

rvāṅgaśuddho bhavati narapateḥ śatrunāśāya nityam .

aśrupātahanugaṇḍahṛdgalaprothaśaṅkhakaṭivastijānuni .

muṣkanābhikakude tathā gude savyakukṣicaraṇeṣu cāśubhāḥ . ye

prapāṇagalakarṇasaṁsthitāḥ pṛṣṭhamadhyanayanopari sthitāḥ .

oṣṭhasakthibhujakukṣipārśvagāste lalāṭasahitāḥ suśobhanāḥ . teṣāṁ

prapāṇa eko lalāṭakeśeṣu ca dhruvāvartaḥ . randhroparandhramūrdhani

vakṣasi ceti smṛtau dvau dvau . ṣaḍbhirdantaiḥ sitābhairbhavati

hayaśiśustaiḥ kaṣāyairdvivarṣaḥ sandaṁśairmadhyamāntyaiḥ

patitasamuditaistrya vdapañcāvdiko’śvaḥ . sandaṁśānukrameṇa

trikaparigaṇitāḥ kālikā pītaśuklāḥ kācā mākṣīkaśaṅkhāatha calanamato

dantapātaṁ ca viddhi . aśnāti sarvam aśakran . 3 agniviśeṣe . aśnute

vyāpnoti . 4 vyāpake tri° aśvaparṇaśabde udāharaṇam . viṣṇoraśvasya

vājinam tā° brā° . 5 yaduvaṁśyacitrakasya putrabhede’śvabāhuśabde

vivṛtiḥ . gotrāpatye aśvā° phañ . āśvāyanaḥ tadgotrāpatye puṁstrī° .

caturarthyāṁ kumudā° ṭhak . āśvikaḥ vājisannikṛṣṭadeśādau tri° . aśvena

carati parpā° ṣṭhan aśvikaḥ aśvena cāriṇi tri° striyāṁ ṅīp .

kasyāyamaśvaḥ ajñāte ka . ajñātasvāmike aśve . kutsito’śvaḥ ka .

aśvakaḥ . kutsite’śve aśva iva saṁjñāyāṁ kan aśvasadṛśasaṁjñāvati pu°

. aśva iva prakṛtikṛtau kan . aśvapratikṛtau . aśvānāṁ samūhaḥ cha yacca

aśvīyam aśvyañca ghoṭakasamūhe na° . etadantasya pādasya bahuvrīhau

hastyādi° nāntyalopaḥ aśvasya pādāiva pādāvasya aśvapāda ityeva .

jātitve’pi ajā° striyāṁ ṭāp . aśvā aśvajātistriyām aśve iva viṣite hāsamāne

ṛ° 3, 33, 1, .

अश्वः — aśvaḥ Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

aśvaḥ [aśnute adhvānaṁ vyāpnoti, mahāśano vā bhavati Nir.; aś-kvan

Uṇ. 1. 149]

(1) A horse; the horses are said to have 7 breeds: —amṛtādbāṣpato

vahrervedebhyoṁ’ḍācca garbhataḥ . sāmno hayānāmutpattiḥ saptadhā

parikīrtitā …

(2) A symbolical expression for the number ‘seven’ (that being the

number of the horses of the sun); sūryāśvairmasajastatāḥ saguravaḥ

śārdūlavikrīḍitaṁ V. Ratn.

(3) A race of men (horselike in strength); kāṣṭhatulyavapurdhṛṣyo

mithyācāraśca nirbhayaḥ . dvādaśāṁgulameḍhraśca daridrastu hayo

mataḥ .. —śvau (du.) A horse and a mare. [cf. L. equus; Gr. hippos; Zend

aspa; Pers. asp.]

— Comp.

—akṣaḥ N. of a plant devasarṣapa. —ajanī a whip.

—adhika a. strong in cavalry, superior in horses.

—adhyakṣaḥ a guardian of horses, commander of cavalry.

—anīkaṁ a troop of horse men, cavalry.

—ariḥ a buffalo.

—avarohakaḥ N. of a tree aśvagaṁdhā. —āyurvedaḥ veterinary

science.

—ārūḍha a. mounted, sitting on horse-back.

—āroha a. riding or mounted on a horse. (

—haḥ) 1. a horseman, rider. —2. one who is fighting. —3. a ride.

(—hā), —ārohakaḥ N. of the plant aśvagaṁdhā. —ārohin a. mounted or

riding on horseback.

—iṣita a. hurried along by horses.

—urasa a. broad-chested like a horse. (

—saṁ) the chief or principal horse.

—kaṁdā, —kaṁdikā N. of a plant aśvagaṁdhā. —karṇaḥ, —

karṇakaḥ 1. a kind of tree (Vatica Robusta) Mal. 9. —2. the ear of a horse.

—3. a term in surgery for a particular fracture of the bones. (

—rṇaḥ) N. of a mountain.

—kuṭī a stable for horses; Pt. 5.

—kuśala, —kovida a. skilled in managing horses.

—kraṁdaḥ 1. N. of a bird. —2. a general of the army of the gods.

—kharajaḥ [aśvaśca kharīca aśvāca kharaśca vā tābhyāṁ jāyate

puṁvadbhāvaḥ Tv.] a kind of horse, mule.

—khuraḥ 1. a horse’s hoof. —2. a kind of perfume. (

—rā) N. of the plant aparājitā. —gatiḥ f. 1. the pace of a horse. —2.

N. of a metre containing four lines of sixteen syllables in each.

—gaṁdhā [aśvasya gaṁdha ekadeśo meḍhramiva mūlamasyāḥ] N.

of a plant Physalis Flexuosa Lin; -tailaṁ a kind of oil.

—goyugaḥ, —gaṁ a pair of horses.

—goṣṭhaṁ a stable.

—grīvaḥ 1. N. of a demon who was a foe of Viṣṇu, more commonly

called Haya-grīva. —2. an incarnation of Viṣṇu.

—ghāsaḥ a pasture for horses.

—ghnaḥ [aśvaṁ haṁti amanuṣyakartṛkatvāt] 1. a horse-bane. —2.

N. of a kind of Oleander, Nerium Odorum Ait.

—cakraṁ 1. a collection of horses. —2. a kind of wheel.

—calanaśālā a riding-house.

—cikitsakaḥ —vaidyaḥ a farrier, a veterinary surgeon.

—cikitsā farriery, veterinary science.

—ceṣṭitaṁ 1. the motion of horses. —2. an omen, auspicious or

inauspicious.

—jaghanaḥ a kind of centaur; a creature having his lower limbs like

those of a horse.

—jit a. gaining horses by conquest.

—tīrthaṁ N. of a place of pilgrimage near Kānyakubja on the

Gaṅgā.

—da a. giving horses.

—daṁṣṭrā the plant Tribulus Lanuginosus (gokṣura). —dāḥ, —dāvan

m. giving horses.

—dūtaḥ a riding messenger.

—nadī N. of a river.

—nāyaḥ one who has the charge of a drove of grazing horses; a

horseherd.

—nibaṁdhikaḥ a groom, a horsefastener.

—nirṇij a. Ved. decorated or embellished with horses.

—paḥ Ved. a groom.

—patiḥ 1. lord of horses. —2. N. of several persons; of a king of

Madra and father of Sāvitrī.

—parṇa a. [aśvānāṁ parṇaṁ gamanaṁ yatra] 1. having horses (as

a chariot); Rv. 1. 88. 1. —2. a cloud (that penetrates everywhere).

—pālaḥ, —pālakaḥ, —rakṣaḥ a horse-groom.

—pucchī N. of the tree māṣapaṇīṁ. —pṛṣṭhaṁ horse-back.

—peśas a. decorated or embellished with horses.

—baṁdhaḥ a groom.

—baṁdhana a. used for fastening horses. (

—naṁ) fastening of horses.

—balā N. of a vegetable.

—bālaḥ 1. a kind of reed, Saccharum Spontaneum Lin. —2. the tail

or hair of a horse.

—budhna a. Ved. based on horses, standing on horses, i. e. on a

carriage drawn by horses.

—budhya a. Ved. based on horses, having its origin in horses

(wealth); distinguished by horses.

—bhā lightning.

—mahiṣikā [aśvamahiṣayorvairaṁ vun] the natural enmity between

a horse and a buffalo.

—māraḥ, —mārakaḥ, —haṁtṛ m. ‘horse-destroying,’ a kind of

Oleander, Nerium Odorum Ait.

—mālaḥ a kind of serpent.

—mukha a. [aśvasya mukhamiva mukhamasya] having the head or

face of a horse. (

—khaḥ) a horse-faced creature, a Kinnara or celestial chorister;

(according to others) a kind of demigod distinct from the preceding. (

—khī) a Kinnara woman; bhiṁdaṁti maṁdāṁ gatimaśvamukhyaḥ

Ku. 1. 11.

—muk m. a horse-stealer.

—medhaḥ [aśvaḥ pradhānatayā medhyate hiṁsyate’tra, medh

hiṁsane ghañ] a horse-sacrifice; yathāśvamedhaḥ kraturāṭ

sarvapāpāpanodanaḥ Ms. 11. 261. [In Vedic times this sacrifice was

performed by kings desirous of offspring; but subsequently it was

performed only by kings and implied that he who instituted it was a

conqueror and king of kings. A horse was turned loose to wander at will

for a year, attended by a guardian; when the horse entered a foreign

country, the ruler was bound either to submit or to fight. In this way the

horse returned at the end of a year, the guardian obtaining or enforcing

the submission of princes whom he brought in his train. After the

successful return of the horse, the rite called Aśvamedha was performed

amidst great rejoicings. It was believed that the performance of 100 such

sacrifices would lead to the attainment of the seat or world of Indra, who

is, therefore, always represented as trying to prevent the completion of

the hundredth sacrifice]. -kāṁḍaṁ N. of the thirteenth book of the

Śatapatha Brahmaṇa.

—medhika, —medhīya a. fit for a horse-sacrifice, or relating to it. (

—kaḥ, —yaḥ) a horse fit for the Asvamedha sacrifice. (

—kaṁ) the fourteenth parvan in the Mahabharata;

tato’śvamedhikaṁ parva proktaṁ tacca caturdaśaṁ Mb.

—yuj a. 1. yoking the horses. —2. having horses yoked to it (as a

carriage); rathenāśvayujā Ram. —3. born under the constellation aśvayuj.

(—f.) 1. N. of a constellation, the head of Aries. —2. the first lunar

mansion. —3. the month of Asvina. —4. a chariot having horses.

—yūpaḥ the post to which the sacrificial horse was bound.

—yoga a. 1. causing the yoking of horses. —2. joining or reaching

as quickly as horses.

—rakṣaḥ the keeper or rider of a horse, a groom.

—rathaḥ a carriage drawn by horses. (

—thā) N. of a river near gaṁdhamādana. —ratnaṁ, —rājaḥ the best

or lord of horses; i. e. uccaiḥśravas. —rādhas a. Ved. furnishing horses.

—rodhakaḥ N. of a plant (aśvamāra). —lakṣaṇaṁ a sign or mark of

a horse.

—lalitaṁ N. of a species of the Vikṛti metre.

—lālā a kind of snake.

—loman n. horse-hair; a kind of snake.

—vaktraḥ = aśvamukha q. v.; a Kinnara or Gandharva.

—vaḍavaṁ a stud of horses and mares. (

—vau) a horse and a mare. (

—vāḥ) horses and mares.

—vadanaḥ = -mukha. —vahaḥ a horseman.

—vāraḥ —vālaḥ, —vārakaḥ [aśvaṁ vārayati upa. sa.] a horseman,

groom; duḥkhena niścakramuraśvavārāḥ Śi. 3. 66.

—vāraṇaṁ N. of the Bos Gavaeus (gavaya). —vāhaḥ, —vāhakaḥ

[aśvaṁ vāhayati cālayati] a horseman.

—vikrayin a. a horse-dealer.

—vid a. 1. skilled in taming or managing horses. —2. [aśvaṁ

viṁdate vid -kvip] procuring horses. (—m.) 1. a jockey. —2. an epithet of

Nala.

—vṛṣaḥ a stallion.

—vaidyaḥ a farrier.

—śakṛt n.,

—śakaṁ Ved. 1. excrements of a horse, horse-dung. —2. N. of a

river.

—śaṁkuḥ a pillar to tie a horse.

—śālā a stable.

—śāvaḥ a colt, a foal.

—śāstraṁ a manual or text-book of veterinary science.

—śiras a. having the head of a horse, an epithet of Narayaṇa. (—n.)

1. a horse’s head. —2. N. of a Dānava.

—śṛgālikā [aśvaśṛgālayorvairaṁ dvaṁdvāt vaire vun] the natural

enmity between a horse and a jackal.

—ṣaḍgavaṁ a set or team of six horses.

—sani, —ṣā, —sā a. Ved. (P. VIII. 3. 110 and Mbh.) gaining or

procuring horses, giving horses.

—sādaḥ, —sādin m. a horseman, a rider, a horse-soldier; R. 7. 47.

—sārathyaṁ coachmanship, charioteership, management of horses

and chariots; sūtānāmaśvasārathyaṁ Ms. 10. 47.

—sūnṛta a. Ved. 1. praised sincerely for (the gift of) horses. —2.

whose praise for (giving) horses is agreeable and true.

—senaḥ 1. N. of a king. —2. N. of a Naga.

—stomīya a. relating to the praise of the sacrificial horse.

—sthāna a. born in a stable. (

—naṁ) a stable or stall for horses.

—haṁtṛ a. killing a horse. (

—tā) N. of a fragrant plant.

—haya a. [aśvena hinoti gacchati hi kartari ac] 1. driving or

spurring a horse, riding a horse; Rv. 10. 26. 5. —2. to be traversed by a

horse; Rv. 9. 96. 2.

—harakaḥ a horse-stealer.

—hṛdayaṁ [aśvasya hṛdayaṁ manogatabhāvādi] 1. the desire or

intention of a horse. —2. a kind of veterinary science. —3. horsemanship;

aśvahṛdaye niveśyātmānaṁ K. 80.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

aśvaḥ puṁ, (aśnute mārgaṁ vyāpnoti . aśū vyāptau aśūpruṣilaṭīti kvan .)

ghoṭakaḥ . tatparyāyaḥ . pītiḥ 2 pītī 3 vītiḥ 4 ghoṭaḥ 5 ghoṭakaḥ 6 turagaḥ

7 turaṅgaḥ 8 turaṅgamaḥ 9 vājī 10 vāhaḥ 11 arvā 12 gandharbaḥ 13

hayaḥ 14 saindhavaḥ 15 saptiḥ 16 . ityamaraḥ taṭṭīkāca ..

(jitasiṁhabhayā nāgā yatrāśvā vilayonayaḥ . iti kumāre ..

gacchantamuccalitacāmaracārumaśvam .. iti śiśupālabadhe ..) aśvena

bhramaṇaguṇāḥ . vātakopanāṅgasthairyabalāgnikāritvaṁ . iti

rājavallabhaḥ .. puṁjātiviśeṣaḥ . tasya lakṣaṇaṁ .

kāṣṭhatulyavapurdhṛṣṭo mithācāraśca nirbhayaḥ .

dvādaśāṅgulameḍhraśca daridrastu hayo mataḥ .. iti ratimañjarī ..

(svanāmakhyāto vṛṣṇivaṁśīyo nṛpatiścitrakasya puttraḥ . yathā —

citrakasyābhavan puttrāḥ pṛthurviprathureva ca . aśvagrīvo’śvavāhuśca

supārśvakagaveṣaṇau .. ariṣṭanemiraśvaśca . iti harivaṁśe .. svanāma

khyāto dānavaśca yathā mahābhārate .

catvāriṁśaddanoḥ puttrāḥ khyātāḥ sarvatra bhārata ..

svarbhānuraśvo’śvapatirvṛṣaparvā jakastathā ..)

ईति — īti Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899īti f. (fr. 4. «ī»?), plague, distress, any calamity of the season (as

drought, excessive rain, swarm of rats, foreign invasion, &c.)

f. infectious disease &c.

f. an affray

f. travelling in foreign countries, sojourning

īti ind. = «iti»

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

īti a. [ī-ktic]

(1) Produced, effected. —tiḥ f. Plague, distress, a calamity of the

season. The ītis are usually said to be six: 1 excessive rain; 2 drought; 3

locusts; 4 rats; 5 parrots; and 6 foreign invasions; ativṛṣṭiranāvṛṣṭiḥ

śalabhāmūṣakāḥ śukāḥ . pratyāsannāśca rājānaḥ ṣaḍetā ītayaḥ smṛtāḥ ..

(some read for the second line svacakraṁ paracakraṁ ca saptaitā ītayaḥ

smṛtāḥ .. making the total number seven); M. 5. 20; Mv. 7. 42; nirātaṁkā

nirītayaḥ R. 1. 63.

(2) An infectious disease.

(3) Travelling (in a foreign country), sojourning (pravāsa).

(4) An affray.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

īti f. 1) «Plage, Noth» AK. 3, 4, 71. H. 126. 60. an. 2, 159. MED. t. 4.

ativṛṣṭiranāvṛṣṭiḥ śalabhā mūṣikāḥ khagāḥ. pratyāsannāśca rājānaḥ

ṣaḍeta ītayaḥ smṛtāḥ.. PARĀŚARA im ŚKDR. (u. ativṛṣṭi). MBH. 3, 11258.

ītayaste (so ist zu lesen) praśāmyantu SUŚR. 1, 17, 19. prajā nirītayaḥ

RAGH. 1, 63. nirītikā diśo dṛṣṭvā R. 1, 32, 24. «ansteckende Krankheit»

VYUTP. 221. — 2) = ḍimba «Schlägerei» MED. — 3) «ein Aufenthalt ausser

Landes» (pravāsa) AK. H. an. MED.

īti 1) ṢAḌV. BR. 5, 5. «Landplage, Alles was dem Getraide schädlich ist»,

VARĀH. BṚH. S. 5, 52. 54. 8, 28. 44. 24, 33. 46, 42. gen. pl. ītinām aus

metrischen Rücksichten HARIV. 12494. tu tathaiva ca st. ītināṁ tathā die

neuere Ausg.

īti = 1. iti R. 7, 32, 65.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

īti ī + ti, f. Calamity, MBh. 3, 11258.

— Comp. nis-, adj. free from calamities, Ragh. 1, 63.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

īti f. plague, distress.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

īti ī-ti, f. calamity; plague.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

īti pu° īyate ī—ktic . 1 ḍigve, 2 utpādite tri° 3 pravāse, ativṛṣṭiranāvṛṣṭiḥ

śalabhāḥ mūṣikāḥ khagāḥ . pratyāsannāśca rājānaḥ ṣaḍetāītayaḥ smṛtā

ityukte 4 kṛṣerupadrava bhede ca strī . nirītibhāvaṁ gamite’tivṛṣṭayaḥ

naiṣa° nirātaṅkānirītayaḥ raghuḥ ītayovyādhayastrantrīrdoṣāḥ

krodhādayastathā . upadravāśca vartante ādhayaḥ kṣudbhayaṁ tathā

bhā° va° 149 a° .

ऋषि — ṛṣi Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899ṛṣi m. (2. «ṛṣ» on ; «ṛṣati jṇānena saṁsāra-pāram» ; perhaps fr. an

obsolete «ṛṣ» for «dṛś», «to see ?» cf. «ṛṣi-kṛt»), a singer of sacred hymns,

an inspired poet or sage, any person who alone or with others invokes

the deities in rhythmical speech or song of a sacred character (e.g. the

ancient hymn-singers Kutsa, Atri, Rebha, Agastya, Kuśika, Vasiṣṭha, Vy-

aśva) &c.

m. the ṛiṣis were regarded by later generations as patriarchal sages or

saints, occupying the same position in India history as the heroes and

patriarchs of other countries, and constitute a peculiar class of beings in

the early mythical system, as distinct from gods, men, Asuras, &c. &c.

m. they are the authors or rather seers of the Vedic hymns i.e.

according to orthodox Hindū ideas they are the inspired personages to

whom these hymns were revealed, and such an expression as «the ṛiṣi

says» is equivalent to «so it stands in the sacred text»

m. seven ṛiṣis, «sapta ṛṣayaḥ», or «saptaṛṣayaḥ» or «saptarṣayaḥ», are

often mentioned in the Brāhmaṇas and later works as typical

representatives of the character and spirit of the pre-historic or mythical

period

m. in

m. in

m. the names of the ṛiṣis of the subsequent Manv-antaras are

enumerated in 417 ff.

m. afterwards three other names are added, viz. Pracetas or Daksha,

Bhṛigu, and Nārada, these ten being created by Manu Svāyambhuva for

the production of all other beings including gods and men &c.

m. in astron. the seven ṛiṣis form the constellation of «the Great Bear

&c.

ṛṣi m. (metaphorically the seven ṛiṣis may stand for the seven senses or

the seven vital airs of the body )

m. a saint or sanctified sage in general, an ascetic, anchorite (this is a

later sense; sometimes three orders of these are enumerated, viz.

Devarshis, Brahmarshis, and Rājarṣis; sometimes seven, four others

being added, viz. Maharshis, Paramarshis, śrutarṣis, and Kāṇdarṣis)

m. xi, 236 &c.

m. the seventh of the eight degrees of Brāhmans

m. a hymn or Mantra composed by a ṛiṣi

m. the Veda on and

m. a symbolical expression for the number seven

m. the moon

m. an imaginary circle

m. a ray of light

m. the fish Cyprinus Rishi ; ([cf. Hib. ‘arsan’, «a sage, a man old in

wisdom»; «arrach», «old, ancient, aged.»]),

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

ṛṣi m. Uṇ. 4, 121. 1) «Sänger heiliger Lieder, Dichter»; so heissen alle,

welche einzeln oder in Chören für sich oder für Andere in kunstreicher

Rede und Gesang zu den Göttern rufen, also insbes. «die priesterlichen

Sänger», welche diese Kunst zu ihrem Beruf machten. agniḥ

pūrvebhirṛṣibhirīḍyo nūtanairuta ṚV. 1, 1, 2. ṛṣīṇāṁ ca stutīrupa yajñaṁ

ca mānuṣāṇām 84, 2. sa ṛṣirvacasyayā 4, 36, 6. gīrbhirvāvṛdhe

gṛṇatāmṛṣīṇām 6, 44, 13. anvenaṁ viprā ṛṣayo madanti 1, 162, 7.

(vācam) anvavindannṛṣiṣu praviṣṭām 10, 71, 3. ṛṣirviprāṇāṁ mahiṣo

mṛgāṇām 9, 96, 6. ṛṣimavatha sāmavipram 5, 54, 14. abhi brahmāṇi

cakṣāthe ṛṣīṇām 7, 70, 5. 1, 189, 8. 4, 50, 1. 5, 75, 1. 6, 34, 1. indrā

varuṇā yadṛṣibhyo manīṣāṁ vāco matiṁ śrutamadattamagre VĀLAKH. 9,

6. yatra ṛṣayo jagmuḥ prathamajāḥ purāṇāḥ VS. 18, 52. 15, 10.

ṛṣimārṣeyam 7, 46. AV. 4, 6, 12. 23, 5. 10, 8, 3. So heissen z. B. Kutsa

ṚV. 1, 106, 6. Atri 117, 3. Rebha 117, 4. Agastya 179, 6. die Kuśika 3, 53,

10. Vasiṣṭha 7, 33, 13. Vyaśva 8, 23, 16. u. s. w. ṛṣiḥ śāstrakṛdācāryaḥ

TRIK. 3, 2, 12. a) Diese «alten Sänger» erscheinen in der Erinnerung

späterer Geschlechter als die «Heiligen der Vorzeit.» Die alte Zeit ist die

Zeit der Ṛṣi, wie es anderswo eine Zeit der Heroen, der Erzväter u. s. w.

giebt. Sie bilden im mythischen Weltsystem eine besondere Klasse von

Wesen, z. B. AV. 10, 10, 26 werden aufgezählt: «Götter, Menschen»,

Asura, «Väter», Ṛṣi. ŚAT. BR. 14, 4, 2, 21. KĀTY. ŚR. 4, 14, 27. ṛṣayo vai

sarasvatyāṁ sattramāsata AIT. BR. 2, 19. 1, 27. ŚAT. BR. 4, 6, 9, 23.

yatkāmā vā eta ṛṣayo juhavuḥ sa ebhyaḥ kāmaḥ samārdhyata 1, 6, 2, 7.

sākṣātkṛtadharmāṇa ṛṣayo babhūvuḥ NIR. 1, 20. devarṣipitṛsevita M. 11,

210. 2, 176. ṛṣayaḥ pitaro devā bhūtānyatithayastathā 3, 80. 81.

devānṛṣīnmanuṣyāṁśca pitṝngṛhyāśca devatāḥ 117. ṛṣibhyaḥ pitaro jātāḥ

201. 194. nāmnāṁ svarūpabhāvo hi bhobhāva ṛṣibhiḥ smṛtaḥ 2, 124. 154.

5, 1. 10, 72. BHAG. 10, 13. 11, 15. SUŚR. 1, 159, 2. — b) Sie sind die

Verfasser der in den Veda aufbewahrten Lieder und Sprüche (yasya

vākyaṁ sa ṛṣiḥ ṚV. ANUKR. NIR. 7, 1) und der Ausdruck: «ein» Ṛṣi «sagt»

heisst so v. a. «es steht im heiligen Text.»

evamuccāvacairabhiprāyairṛṣīṇāṁ mantradṛṣṭayo bhavanti NIR. 7, 3.

etadṛṣiḥ paśyannabhyanūvāca AIT. BR. 2, 25. tadapyetadṛṣiṇoktam 8, 26.

ŚAT. BR. 10, 4, 1, 9. 1, 7, 4, 4. 2, 3, 3, 6. 5, 1, 4. 6, 1, 1, 1. ṚV. PRĀT. 16,

10. ṛṣivacanaṁ vedaḥ SUŚR. 1, 148, 1. tathaiva vedānṛṣayastapasā

pratipedire M. 11, 243. ṛṣibhirbahudhā gītaṁ chandobhirvividhaiḥ pṛthak

BHAG. 13, 4. ṛṣayo mantradraṣṭāro vasiṣṭhādayaḥ P. 4, 1, 114, Sch.

Daher = veda TRIK. 3, 3, 435. H. an. 2, 558. MED. sh. 6. Geradezu für

mantra steht das Wort P. 3, 2, 186. 4, 4, 96. ṛṣimukha «der Anfang eines»

Ṛṣi d. i. «des von ihm verfassten» Maṇḍala «im» ṚV. PĀR. GṚHY. 2, 10 in

ZdmG.VII, 538. — c) sapta ṛṣayaḥ, saptaṛṣayaḥ oder saptarṣayaḥ (P. 2, 1,

50, Sch.) «sieben» Ṛṣi — eine unbestimmte Vielheit — sind die

Repräsentanten jener heiligen Vorzeit: ṛṣayaḥ sapta daivyāḥ ṚV. 10, 130,

7. asmākamatra pitarasta āsansapta ṛṣayo daurgahe badhyamāne 4, 42,

8 (vgl. ŚAT. BR. 13, 5, 4, 5). saptaṛṣayastapase ye niṣeduḥ 10, 109, 4.

VS. 14, 28. AV. 11, 1, 1. 24. 12, 1, 39. ŚAT. BR. 14, 5, 2, 4. 5.

saptaṛṣīṇāṁ sukṛtāṁ yatra lokastatremaṁ yajñaṁ yajamānaṁ ca dhehi

KĀTY. ŚR. 2, 2, 8 (vgl. VS. 18, 52). Eine namentliche Aufzählung

derselben wird nachmals versucht, z. B. ŚAT. BR. 14, 5, 2, 6: Gotama,

Bharadvāja, Viśvāmitra, Jamadagni, Vasiṣṭha, Kaśyapa, Atri; ebenso in

einem Pariśiṣṭa zu ĀŚV. ŚR. 12, 15. MBH. 1, 4807. 13, 4461. fgg. Marīci,

Atri, Añgiras, Pulaha, Kratu, Pulastja, Vasiṣṭha (Söhne Brahman’s und

zugleich die 7 Prajāpati) MBH. 12, 12724. fg. sind die «sieben» Ṛṣi im

1sten Manvantara HARIV. 413. VP. 49, N. 2. die der folgenden werden

aufgezählt HARIV. 417. fgg. VP. 260. fgg. saptarṣi sg. «einer der sieben»

Ṛṣi MBH. 13, 1339. saptarṣikuṇḍa pl. «den sieben» Ṛṣi «geheiligte

Badeplätze» 3, 6042. saptarṣika HARIV. 464. Am Himmel sind die

«sieben» Ṛṣi «die sieben Sterne des grossen Bären» NAIGH. 1, 5. NIR. 10,

26. AK. 1, 1, 2, 28. H. 124. yatrā saptaṛṣīnpara ekamāhuḥ ṚV. 10, 82, 2.

saptaṛṣīṇāṁ ca haviṣābhayaṁ no astu AV. 6, 40, 1. saptarṣīnu ha sma vai

purarkṣā ityācakṣate, amī hyuttarāhi saptarṣaya udyanti ŚAT. BR. 2, 1, 2,

4. 13, 8, 1, 9. ĀŚV. GṚHY. 1, 7. KAUŚ. 127. MBH. 14, 2633. R. 1, 13, 29.

tato brahmatapoyogātprajāpatirivāparaḥ. (kauśikaḥ) sasarja dakṣiṇe

bhāge saptarṣīnaparānpunaḥ.. VIŚV. 10, 20. VP. 485. fg. COLEBR. Misc.

Ess. II, 352. 355. Für jede Weltgegend verschiedene 7 Ṛṣi MBH. 13, 7108.

fgg. 7663. fgg. Bildlich bezeichnet der Ausdruck «die sieben» Ṛṣi auch «die

sieben Sinne» oder «den siebenfachen Hauch» (prāṇa) NIR. 12, 37. 38.

VS. 34, 55. ŚAT. BR. 14, 5, 2, 4. 5. KĀTY. ŚR. 9, 12, 4. — d) in der Folge

bezeichnet Ṛṣi überh. «jede durch Frömmigkeit und Weisheit geheiligte

Person», namentl. «einen Einsiedler»: ṛṣayaḥ satyavacasaḥ AK. 2, 7, 42.

H. 76. an. 2, 558. ṛṣayo dīrghasaṁdhyatvāddīrghamāyuravāpnuyuḥ.

prajāṁ yaśaśca kīrtiṁ ca brahmavarcasameva ca.. M. 4, 94. ṛṣayaḥ

saṁyatātmānaḥ phalamūlānilāśanāḥ. tapasaiva prapaśyanti trailokyaṁ

sacarācaram.. 11, 236. BHAG. 5, 25. N. 12, 54. R. 1, 1, 42. 4, 13. 7, 1.

ŚĀK. 17. 62, 16. RAGH. 1, 50. ṛṣikuleṣu 12, 25. ṛṣikumāra «ein junger

Einsiedler» ŚĀK. 27, 15. ṛṣikumāraka 50, 1. — e) drei Arten von Ṛṣi

werden erwähnt VP. 284: Devarshi, Brahmarshi, Rājarṣi; dieselben und

ausserdem Maharshi, Paramarshi, Śrutarṣi und Kāṇḍarṣi TRIK. 2, 7, 15.

fgg. — 2) «Lichtstrahl» MED. sh. 6. — 3) «an imaginary circle» KĀLAS. p.

379. — 4) N. eines Fisches, «Cyprinus Rishi», CAREY bei HAUGHTON, A

Dict. Beng. and S. — Die Ableitung des Wortes von darś, wobei die Ṛṣi als

die mit dem geistigen Auge die göttlichen Geheimnisse und das Lob der

Götter «Erschauenden», also besonderer Offenbarung Theilhaftigen,

gedacht werden, giebt schon AUPAMANJAVA NIR. 2, 11; eine Legende

führt es auf arṣ zurück ebend. und TAITT. ĀR. 2, 9. Begrifflich stellt sich

das Wort am natürlichsten zu 1. arc, aber der Wechsel zwischen ca und

ṣa macht Schwierigkeit. — Vgl. ekarṣi, yatharṣi, viprarṣi und die u. 1,e.

aufgeführten Zusammensetzungen.

ṛṣi 5) Bez. «der Zahl sieben» Ind. St. 8, 167. — 6) «der Mond» WEBER,

JYOT. 89. fgg.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

ṛṣi Agni Purāṇa, Chapter 348 states that the letter «Ṛ» means «sound».

The word «Ṛṣi» is derived from this root. During the period when the art

of writing was not known, Vedas, Śāstras and other sacred lore were

communicated through the mouth of the Ṛṣis. The voice of Āṛṣa Bhārata

itself is the voice of the Ṛṣis. Hindus believe that the Vedas are the

outcome of the inspiration, introspection and spiritual vision of the Ṛṣis.

There is a Saṁskṛta stanza defining a Ṛṣi, which is given below:

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

ṛṣi ṛṣ + i (for original ṛṣan, cf. akṣi for akṣan, asthi for asthan, etc., =

[greek]), m.

1. A bard or author of sacred hymns, Chr. 287, 1. 3; Man. 11, 243.

2. An old saint, MBh. 12, 12724; Hariv. 417, seq.

3. A pious person, especially an anchorite, Man. 4, 94.

— Comp. devarṣi, i. e. deva-ṛṣi, m. a sage of the class of demi-gods, as

Nārada, VP. 284; Rām. 1, 1, 83. brahmarṣi, i. e. brahman- and viprarṣi, i.

e. vipra-, m. a sage of the class of Brāhmaṇas, as Vaśiṣṭha, VP. 284; Chr.

22, 20; 14, 17. rājarṣi, i. e. rājan-, m. a prince who has adopted a life of

devotion, as Viśvāmitra, VP. 284; Chr. 11, 16; Pañc. 76, 9. saptarṣi, see

separately.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

ṛṣi m. holy singer, poet, saint, sage, hermit, a Rishi; pl. w. saptan the

seven (i.e. many) Rishis of the olden times, or the seven stars of the

Great Bear.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

ṛṣi ṛṣ-i, m. bard or author of sacred hymns, poet, priestly singer; saint or

sage of the olden time; a special class of revered beings, whose number

is often limited to seven; C. person renowned for wisdom and piety, esp.

an anchorite: p. the seven stars of the great Bear;

-kumāra, m. anchorite boy;

-tva, n. state of a Ṛṣi;

-putra, m. son of a Ṛṣi;

-yajña, m. sacrifice to the Ṛṣis = Vedic study;

-vat, ad. like a Ṛṣi.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

ṛṣi pu° ṛṣati jñānena saṁsārapāraṁ ṛṣī gatau ki . jñānena

saṁsārapāragate 1 vaśiṣṭhādau 2 śāstrakṛdācārye 3 vede 4 kiraṇe ca

tasyavyutpattiryathā . ṛṣī hiṁsā gatau dhāturvidyāsatyatapaḥśrutiḥ . eṣa

sannicayo yasmāt brāhmaṇaśca tatastvṛṣiḥ . vivṛttasamakālaṁtu

buddhvyā vṛttimṛṣistvayam . ṛṣanti paramāṁ yasmāt paramarṣistata,

smṛtaḥ . gatyarthādṛṣate rdhātornāmanirvṛttikāraṇam . yasmādetat

svatambhūtastasmācca ṛṣitā mateti matsyā° pu° 120 a° ajān ha vai

pṛśnīṁ stapasyamānān brahma svayambhvabhyānarṣatte ṛṣayo’pavatu

tadṛṣīṇāmṛṣitvam aita° brā° halādirapyatra vidyāvidaradhamatayoviṣayaḥ

prasiddhāḥ bharataḥ . sapta brahma rṣidevarṣimaharṣiparamarṣayaḥ .

kāṇḍarṣiśca śrutarṣiśca rājarṣiśca kramāvarāḥ ratnakoṣokte saptavidha

ṛṣirbhavati . teṣāṁ viśeṣaḥ trikā° uktaḥ yathā vyāsādyāstu maharṣayaḥ .

paramarṣayastu bhelādyāḥ devarṣayaḥ kaṇādayaḥ . brahmarṣayo

vasiṣṭhādyāḥ suśrutādyāḥ śrutavarṣayaḥ . ṛtaparṇādayo rājarṣayaḥ

kāṇḍarṣayastvamī . jaiminya dyāḥ vasiṣṭhādyāśca marīcyādyāḥ daśa .

bhṛgurmarīciratriśca aṅgirā pulahaḥ kratuḥ . manurdakṣo vasiṣṭhaśca

pulastyaśceti te daśa . brahmaṇo mānasāhyete utpannāḥ svayamīśvarāḥ .

paratvenarṣayastasmādbhūtāstasmānmaharṣayaḥ matsya° 120 a° .

teṣāṁ putrāṇāṁ tu tapasaiva ṛṣitvaṁ yathoktaṁ tatraiva īśvarāṇāṁ

sutāsteṣāmṛṣayastān nibodhata . kāvyo vṛhaspatiścaiva

kaśyapaścyavanastathā . utathyo vāmadevaśca agastyaḥ kauśikastathā .

kardamo bālakhilyāśca viśravāḥ śaktivarcasaḥ . ityete ṛṣayaḥ

proktāstapasā ṛṣitāṁ gatāḥ . kintu marīcyādīnāmeva ṛṣitvaṁ bhūri

prasiddham . taeva bhogasamāptau nakṣatrarūpeṇa gaganamaṇḍale

uttarasyāṁ sārundhatīkāḥ sthitābabhraṁmyante teṣāṁ ca gati

kālasahitacārādi nirūpitaṁ vṛha° saṁ° yathā saikāvalīva rājati

sasitotpalamālinī sahāseva . nāthavatīva ca digyaiḥ kauberī

saptabhirmunibhiḥ . dhruvanāyakopadeśānnarinartīvottarā bhramadbhiśca

. yaiścāramahaṁ teṣāṁ kathayiṣye vṛddhagargamatāt . āsanmaghāsu

munayaḥ śāsati pṛthvīṁ yudhiṣṭhire nṛpatau . ṣaḍdvikapañcadviyutaḥ

(2526) śakakālastasya rājñaśca . ekaikasminnṛkṣe śataṁ śataṁ te

caranti varṣāṇām . prāguttarataścaite sadodayante sasādhvīkāḥ . pūrve

bhāge bhagavān marīcirapare sthito vasiṣṭho’smāt .

tasyāṅgirāstato’tristasyāsannaḥ pulastyaśca . pulahaḥ kraturiti

bhagavānāsannānukrameṇa pūrvādyāḥ . tatra vasiṣṭhaṁ

munivaramupāśritārundhatī sādhvī . ulkāśanidhūmādyairhatā vivarṇā

viraśmayo hrasvāḥ . hanyuḥ svaṁ svaṁ vargaṁ vipulāḥ snigdhāśca

tadvṛddhyai . gandharvadevadānavamantrauṣadhisiddhayakṣanāgānām .

pīḍākaro marīcirjñeyo vidyādharāṇāṁ ca .

śakayavanadaradapāratakāmbojāṁstāpasān vatopetān . hanti

vasiṣṭho’bhihato vivṛddhido raśmisampannaḥ . aṅgiraso jñānayutā

dhīmanto brāhmaṇāśca nirdiṣṭāḥ . atreḥ kājārabhavā jalajānyambhonidhiḥ

saritaḥ . rakṣaḥpiśāvadānavadaityabhujaṅgāḥ smṛtāḥ pulastyasya .

pulahasya tu mūlaphalam kratostu yajñāḥ sayajñabhṛtaḥ . ete ca

svāyammuva manvantare saptarṣaya āsan tato’dhikārasamāptau

nakṣatrarūpeṇa nabhomaṇḍale sthitāḥ . manvantarabhede tu anye eva

saptarṣayobhavanti yathāha hari° . 1 marīciratrirbhagavānaṅgirāḥ

pulahaḥ kratuḥ . pulastyaśca vaśiṣṭhaśca saptaite brahmaṇaḥ sutāḥ .

uttarasyāṁ diśi tathā rājan . saptarṣayaḥ smṛtāḥ . nābhā nāma tathā

devāstvāsan svāyambhuve’ntare . 2 aurvo vaśiṣṭhaputraśca stambaḥ

kāśyapa eva ca . prāṇovṛhaspatiścaiva dattoniścyavanastathā . ete

maharṣayastāta! vāyuproktā mahāvratāḥ . 3 vasiṣṭhaputrāḥ saptāsan

vāsiṣṭhā iti viśrutāḥ . hiraṇyagarbhasya sutā ūrjānāma sutejasaḥ .

ṛṣayo’tra mayā proktāḥ kīrtyamānānnibādha tān . 4 kāvyaḥ

pṛyustathaivāgnirjanturdhāmā ca bhārata . kapīvāna kapīvāṁśca tatra

saptarṣayo’pare . 5 vedabāhuryadudhraśca munirvedaśirāstathā .

hiraṇyarobhāparjanya ūrdhabāhuśca somajaḥ . satyanetrastathā’treya ete

saptarṣayo’pare 6 bhṛgurnabho vivasvāṁśca sudhāmā virajastathā .

atināmā sahiṣṇuśca saptaite tu maharṣayuḥ . cākṣuṣasyāntare tāta!

manordevānimān śṛṇu 7 atrirvaśiṣṭho bhagavān kaśyapaśca mahānṛṣiḥ

gautamaśca bharaddājoviśvāmitrastathaiva ca . tathaiva putro

bhagavānṛcīkasya mahātmanaḥ . saptamojamadagniśca ṛṣayaḥ

sāmpratraṁ divi . manvantare vyatikrānte catvāraḥ saptakā gaṇāḥ . kṛtvā

kama divaṁ yānti brahmalokamanāmayam . tato’nye tapasā yuktāḥ

sthānaṁ tatpūrayantyuta . atītāvartamānāśca krameṇaitena bhārata! .

etānyuktāni kauravya! saptātītāni bhārata! 8 rāmo vyāsastathātreyo

dīptimāniti viśrutaḥ . bhāradvājastayādroṇiraśvatthāmā mahādyutiḥ .

gautamasyātmajaścaiva śaradvānnāma gautamaḥ . kauśiko gālavaścaiva

ruruḥ kāśyapa eva ca . ete ścapta mahātmānobhaviṣyā munisattamāḥ .

brahmaṇaḥ sadṛśāścaite dhanyāḥ saptarṣayaḥ smṛtāḥ . 9 medhātidhistu

paulastvovasuḥ kāśyapa eva ca . jyotiṣmān bhārgavaścaiva

dyutimānaṅgirāstathā . savanaṁścaiva vāśiṣṭha ātreyo havyavāhanaḥ .

paulahaḥ satyaḥ ityete munayo rauhite’ntare 10 daśame tvatha paryāye

dvitīyasyāntare manoḥ . haviṣmāna paulahaścaiva sukṛtiścaiva bhārgavaḥ

. āpomūrtistathātreyo vāśiṣṭhaścāṣṭakaḥ smṛtaḥ . paulastyaḥ

pramatiścaiva nabhogaścaiva kaśyapaḥ . aṅgirānabhasaḥ satyaḥ saptaiva

paramarṣayaḥ . 11 ekādaśe tu paryāye tṛtīyaspāntare manoḥ . tasya

sapta ṛrṣīścāpi kīrtya mānānnibādha me . haviṣmān kāśyapaścāpi

haviṣmān yaścaṁ bhārgavaḥ . taruṇaśca tathātreyovāsiṣṭha

stanayastathā . aṅgirāścodadhiṣṇyaśca paulastyoniścarastathā .

pulahaścāgnitejāśca bhavyāḥ bhapta maharṣayaḥ . 12 caturthasyātha

sāvarṇa ṛṣīn saptaśṛṇuṣva me . dyutirvaśiṣṭha putraśca ātreyaḥ

sutapāstathā . aṅgirāstapasomūrti stapasvī kāśyapastathā .

tapodhanaśca paulastyaḥ paulahaśca taporaviḥ .

bhārgavaḥsaptamasteṣām 13 trayodaśe’tha paryāye bhavye manvantare

manoḥ . aṅgirāścaiva dhṛtimān paulastyo havyapastu yaḥ .

paulahastattvadarśī ca bhārgavaśca nirutsukaḥ . niṣprakampastathātreyo

nirmohaḥ kāśyapastathā . vetapāścaiva vāsiṣṭhaḥ saptaite tu maharṣayaḥ

. 14 caturdaśe’tha paryāye bhautyasyaivāntare manoḥ . agnīdhraḥ

kāśyapaścaiva paulastyo bhārgavastathā . bhārgavohyatibāhuśca

śucirāṅgirasastathā . yuktaścaiva tathātreyaḥ śukrovāśiṣṭha evaca . ajitaḥ

paulahaścaiva antyāḥ saptarṣayaśca te . saptarṣīṇāṁ uttarāhyudayaśca

śata° brā° 2, 1, 2, 1 . uktaḥ yathā saptarṣīnuha sma vai purarkṣā

ityācakṣate amīhyuttarāhi saptarṣaya udyanti . viśvāmitrasṛṣṭāḥ

saptarṣayastu dakṣiṇasyāṁ nabhomaṇḍale sthitāḥ taduktaṁ tato

brahmatapoyogāt prajāpatirivāparaḥ . sasarja dakṣiṇe bhāge

saptarṣīnaparān punaḥ . manumekāgramāsīnamabhigamya maharṣayaḥ .

ṛṣayo dīrghasandhyatvāddīrghamāyuravāpnuyuḥ . ṛṣayaḥsaṁyatātmānaḥ

iti ca manuḥ . vasannṛ ṣikuleṣu saḥ ākīrṇamṛṣipatnīnām raghuḥ . ṛṣīn

jyotirmayān sapta saptarṣihastāvacitāvaśeṣāṇyadho vivasvān

parivartamānaḥ kumā° . vedamantrasya prathamaṁ 14 draṣṭari ca .

thena yadṛṣiṇā dṛṣṭaṁ siddhiḥ prāptā ca yena vai . mantreṇa, tasya tat

proktamṛṣibhāvaḥ sa ucyate yogi yā° . yena ṛṣiṇā kalpādau

yomantrodṛṣṭastasya mantrasya sa ṛṣiḥ . tajjñānāvaśyakatvamārṣaśabde

darśitam tatra vaidikamantrāṇāmṛṣinirūpaṇañca sarvānukramaṇikādau

dṛśyaṁ saṁkṣepeṇa tatroktamatrocyate . sarvamāgneyaṁ gāyatraṁ

gautamīyam, sarvaṁ sāvitramauṣṇihaṁ bhāradvājīyam, sarvaṁ

saumyamānuṣṭubhamātharvaṇikam . sarvaṁ vārhaspatyaṁ

vārhatamāṅgirasam, sarvaṁ vāruṇaṁ pāṅktamālambāyanīyam,

sarvamaindraṁ traiṣṭubhaṁ yājñavalkīyaṁ, sarvamādityadaivataṁ

jāgatam kautsam . jyotiṣṭome dīkṣāprabhṛti vakṣyamāṇa dīkṣāyāṁ

bhṛguragnāviṣṇūgāyatrī . prāyaṇīye, āṅgiraso’ditiruṣṇik, kraye viśvāmitraḥ

somo’nuṣṭup . ātithyai vasiṣṭho viṣṇurvṛhatī, pravargye kaśyapa ādityaḥ

paṅktiḥ . upasatsvātreya upasaddevatā triṣṭup .

agnīṣomīye’gastyo’gnīṣomau jagatī . prāyaṇīye’tirātra āgniveśyo’horātre

atijagatī, caturviṁśatyahe saukarāyaṇaḥ saṁvatsaraḥ śakvarī . atiplave

ṣaḍahe sāvarṇo’rdhamāsā māsāśceti śakvarī, pṛṣṭhye ṣaḍahe sāvakāyana

ṛtavo’ṣṭiḥ, abhijiti, priyavrato’gniratyaṣṭiḥ, svarasāmasu sarasvatyāpi

dhṛtiḥ, viṣuvati rauhiṇāyaṇa ādityo’tidhṛtiḥ, viśvajiti saubhara indra nirṛtiḥ

kṛtiḥ, go āyuṣorvārkalirmitrāvaruṇau prakṛtiḥ, daśarātra ācāryo viśvedevā

ākṛtiḥ, daśarātrike pṛṣṭye ṣaḍahe māveyo diśo vikṛtiḥ, chandogeṣu

śvaulvāyana ime lokāḥ saṁkṛtiḥ, daśame’hani parāśaraḥ

saṁvatasaro’tikṛtiḥ, mahāvrate śailinaḥ prajāpatirutkṛtiḥ,

udayanīye’tirātre bhauvanāyano vāyuśchandāṁsi sarvāṇi,

ṛṣibhirupalakṣitaṁ vākyamṛṣayaḥ . adhikaṁ hemā° vrata° dṛśyam . bhāve

ki . 15 darśane 16 jñāne ca . ṛṣikṛt ṛṣimanāḥ . 17 tantroktamantrasya

prathamopāsānena siddhe ṛṣyādiśabde pu° udā° .

कुभृत् — kubhṛt Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899kubhṛt «ku-bhṛt» m. = «-dhara»

kubhṛt «ku-bhṛt» m. (hence) the number «seven»,

kubhṛt «ku-bhṛt» see 2. «ku».

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

kubhṛt m. A mountain or a king.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

kubhṛt pu° kuṁ pṛthivīṁ bibharti bhṛ—kvip . 1 bhūdhare śaile 2

saptasaṁkhyāyām . ekādiśabde 1508 pṛ° vivṛtiḥ kubhṛdresrikaṁ

saptaśālākacakram jyoti° .

तुरंग — turaṁga Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899turaṁga «tura-ṁ-ga» m. «going quickly», a horse &c.

turaṁga «tura-ṁ-ga» m. (hence) the number 7

m. the mind, thought

turaṁga «tura-ṁ-ga» m. = «-raga-gandhā»

turaṁga «tura-ṁ-ga» m. «-gāri» m. «orse-enemy», a buffalo

m. Nerium odorum

turaṁga «tura-ṁ-ga» m. «-gāhvā» f. the jujube

turaṁga «tura-ṁ-ga» m. «-gī-bhūya» ind. p. having become a horse

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

turaṁga (turam + 1. ga) 1) m. a) «Pferd» AK. 2, 8, 2, 11. H. 1232. M. 12,

43. SUŚR. 1, 79, 19. 2, 512, 7. ŚĀK. 101. RAGH. 3, 38. 13, 3. PAÑCAT. I,

314. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 5, 72. 30, 4. 104, 63. KATHĀS. 10, 122. PRAB. 78,

14. Wegen der «sieben Pferde des Sonnengottes» als Bez. der «Zahl

sieben» ŚRUT. 19. SŪRYAS. 2, 26. — b) «der Geist, der Gedanke»

ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. — 2) f. ī a) «Stute» WILS. — b) = turagī «Physalis

flexuosa Lin.» ŚABDAR. = ghoṭikā «Cucumis utilissimus Roxb.» RĀJAN. im

ŚKDR. — Vgl. turaga, turaṁgama.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

turaṁga turaṁga, i. e. tur + a + m-ga, m. A horse, Pañc. i. d. 314.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

turaṁga m. (ī f.) = turaga.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

turaṁga turaṁ-ga, m. (swift-goer), horse.

तुरंगः — turaṁgaḥ Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

turaṁgaḥ [tureṇa gacchati, gam-kha mum vā ḍicca]

(1) A horse; bhānuḥ sakṛdyuktaturaṁga eva S. 5. 5; R. 3. 38, 13. 3.

(2) A name for the number ‘seven’.

(3) The heart, mind. —gī A mare.

— Comp.

—ariḥ 1. a buffalo —2. fragrant oleander.

—ārūḍhaḥ a horseman.

—dviṣaṇī a she-buffalo.

—priyaḥ —yaṁ barley.

—medhaḥ a horsesacrifice; R. 13. 61.

—yāyin, —sādin m. a horseman.

—vaktraḥ, —vadanaḥ a Kinnara.

—śālā, —sthānaṁ a horsestable.

—skaṁdhaḥ a troop of horses.

तुरग — turaga Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899turaga «tura-ga» m. «going quickly», a horse &c.

turaga «tura-ga» m. (hence) the number 7

m. the mind, thought

turaga «tura-ga» m. = «-ga-gandhā»

turaga «tura-ga» m. «-gānana» m. pl. «orse-faced», N. of a people

turaga «tura-ga» m. «-gāroha» m. a horseman, xv, 26

turaga «tura-ga» m. _ «-gopacāraka» m. = «-ga-rakṣa», x, 3.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

turaga (2. tura «rasch» + 1. ga «gehend») 1) m. VOP. 26, 61. a) «Pferd»

AK. 2, 8, 2, 11. H. 1232. an. 3, 122. MED. g. 36. BHARTṚ. 3, 73. RAGH. 1,

42. 3, 51. ŚĀK. 31. PAÑCAT. I, 314. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 7, 6. 10, 3. 11, 4.

VID. 46. PRAB. 35, 4. — b) «der Geist, der Gedanke» H. an. MED. — 2) f. ī

a) «Stute» ŚATR. 14, 112. 115. — b) = aśvagandhā «Physalis flexuosa

Lin.» (ein Strauch) TRIK. 3, 3, 60. H. an. MED. — Vgl. turaṁga,

turaṁgama.

turaga 1) a) Bez. «der Zahl sieben» (wegen der «sieben Rosse» des

Sonnengottes) Ind. St. 8, 386.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

turaga tura + -ga,

1. m. A horse, Pañc. i. d. 314.

2. f. gī, A mare, Śatr. 14, 112.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

turaga m. a horse (lit. = seq.); f. ī a mare.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

turaga puṁstrī tureṇa vegena gacchati gama—ḍa . ghoṭake amaraḥ

striyāṁ jātitvāt ṅīṣ . turagaśatākulasya paramekaturaṅgajanmanaḥ .

ullaṅghya gantuṁ turagāstadoṣuḥ māghaḥ 2 citte mediniḥ .

mugdhabodhe turāṁ vegaṁ gacchatīti vākyam .

नग — naga Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899naga «na-ga» m. see «naga».

naga «na-ga» m. «not moving» (cf. «a-ga»), a mountain (ifc. f. «ā»; cf.

«sa-naga») &c.

m. the number 7 (because of the 7 principal mountains; cf. «kula-giri»)

m. any tree or plant &c.

m. a serpent

m. the sun

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

naga (naga UṆĀDIS. 5, 61) m. 1) «Berg» AK. 3, 4, 3, 20. TRIK. 2, 3, 1. H.

1027. an. 2, 28. 29. MED. g. 2. apsu bhūmau nageṣu dikṣu AV. 19, 8, 1.

himavantaṁ nageśvaram PĀR. GṚHY. 3, 4. N. 13, 8. HARIV. 4181. R. 6,

83, 1. 20. KUMĀRAS. 7, 72. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 3, 9. SŪRYAS. 12, 37. 38.

KATHĀS. 22, 16. BHĀG. P. 5, 13, 8. 8, 18, 4. sanagāṁ mahīm MBH. 1,

2492. Wegen «der 7 Hauptberge» (vgl. kulaparvata) symb. Bez. «der Zahl

sieben» SŪRYAS. 1, 31. 2, 19. 24. 8, 3. 12, 90. — 2) «Baum» AK. H. 1114.

H. an. MED. gulmavallīnageṣu M. 8, 330. nipapāta bhūmau nago

nagāgrādiva vātarugnaḥ MBH. 4, 1672. 12, 12087. R. 5, 3, 19.

bhidyamānamivāśaktastrātamunyo nago nagam DAŚ. 1, 40.

puṣpitānnagān R. 2, 56, 6. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 42 (43), 18. BHĀG. P. 4, 9,

13. 8, 5, 34. «Pflanze» überh. (viell. auch adj. «der seinen Platz nicht

verlässt, unbeweglich») im Gegensatz zu jaṅgama MBH. 12, 5730. — 3)

«Schlange.» — 4) «Sonne» H. an. — Nach P. 6, 3, 77 und VOP. 26, 33 = 1.

na + 1. ga «sich nicht bewegend, seinen Platz nicht verlassend.» — Vgl.

aga.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

naga na-ga,

I. adj. Immoveable, MBh. 12, 5730 (?).

II. m.

1. A mountain, Rām. 6, 83, 1.

2. A tree, Man. 8, 330.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

naga m. mountain; tree, plant i.g.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

naga na-ga, m. mountain; tree.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

naga pu° na gacchati gama—ḍa nago’prāṇiṣu pā° naño na nalopaḥ . 1

parvate 2 vṛkṣe ca amaraḥ . nagajā nagajā dayitā dayitāḥ bhaṭṭiḥ

nagāhvayo nāma nagārisūnuḥ bhā° vi° 39 a° . aprāṇiṣvityukteḥ ago

vṛścikaḥ śītenetyādau nalopaḥ iti bodhyam .

नगः — nagaḥ Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

nagaḥ [na gacchati, gam-ḍa]

(1) A mountain; Ku. 1. 1; 7. 72; Śi. 6. 79.

(2) A tree.

(3) A plant in general.

(4) The sun.

(5) A serpent.

(6) The number ‘seven’.

— Comp.

—aṭanaḥ a monkey.

—adhipaḥ, —adhirājaḥ, —iṁdraḥ 1. Himālaya (the lord of

mountains). —2. the Sumeru mountain.

—ariḥ an epithet of Indra.

—āvāsaḥ a peacock.

—ucchrāyaḥ the height of a mountain.

—okas m. 1. a bird (in general). —2. a crow. —3. a lion. —4. the

fabulous animal called śarabha. —ja a. produced in a mountain,

mountain-born; Bk. 10. 9. (

—jaḥ) an elephant.

—jā, —naṁdinī epithets of Pārvatī.

—patiḥ 1. the Himālaya mountain. —2. the moon (as the lord of

plants and herbs).

—bhid m. 1. an axe. —2. an epithet of Indra. —3. a crow.

—mūrdhan m. the crest or brow of a mountain.

—raṁdhrakaraḥ an epithet of Kārtikeya; R. 9. 2.

—vāhanaḥ an epithet of Śiva.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

nagaḥ puṁ, (na gacchatīti . na + gam + ḍaḥ . yadvā, dahyate iti . daha +

dahergo lopo daśca naḥ . uṇāṁ . 5 . 61 . iti gaḥ . dhātorantalopaḥ . dasya

ca naḥ .) parvataḥ . (yathā, kumāre . 7 . 72 .

nave dukūle ca nagopanītaṁ pratyagrahīt sarvamamantravarjam ..)

vṛkṣaḥ . ityamaraḥ . 3 . 3 . 19 .. (yathā, mahābhārate . 1 . 43 . 6 .

taṁ dagdhvā sa nagaṁ nāgaḥ kaśyapaṁ punarabravīt .

kuru yatnaṁ dbijaśreṣṭha ! jīvayainaṁ vanaspatim .. sthāvaramātram

. yathā, viṣṇupurāṇe . 1 . 5 . 6 .

mukhyā nagā yataścoktā mukhyasargastatastvayam . nagāḥ

sthāvarāḥ . iti taṭṭīkāyāṁ svāmī ..)

पर्वत — parvata Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899parvata mfn. (fr. «parvan» cf. 10 knotty, rugged (said of mountains)

(according to = «parutka, parva-vat»)

parvata m. a mountain, mountain-range, height, hill, rock (often

personified; ifc. f. «ā») &c. &c.

parvata m. an artificial mound or heap (of grain, salt, silver, gold &c.

presented to Brāhmans cf. «-dāna»)

parvata m. the number 7 (from the 7 principal mountain-ranges)

parvata m. a fragment of rock, a stone («adrayaḥ parvatāḥ», the stones

for pressing Soma)

parvata m. a (mountain-like) cloud (cf.

parvata m. a tree

parvata m. a species of pot-herb

parvata m. a species of fish (Silurus Pabda)

parvata m. N. of a Vasu

parvata m. of a ṛiṣi (associated with Nārada and messenger of the gods,

supposed author of , where he has the patr. Kāṇva and Kāśyapa)

parvata m. of a son of Paurṇamāsa (son of Marīci and Sambhūti)

parvata m. of a minister of king Purū-ravas

parvata m. of a monkey

parvata m. of one of the 10 religious orders founded by Saṁkarācārya’s

pupils (whose members add the word «parvata» to their names)

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

parvata (von parvan) P. 5, 2, 122, Vārtt. 11. VOP. 7, 32. 33. (parvata

UṆĀDIS. 3, 110.) 1) m. a) «Gebirge, Berg, Höhe, Hügel, Fels (aus Knoten

—, Absätzen bestehend») AK. 2, 3, 1. H. 1027. an. 3, 278. MED. t. 127.

HALĀY. 2, 10. 5, 9. 52. 53. mit giri verbunden, so dass die urspr. adj. Bed.

noch durchscheint: parvataṁ girim ṚV. 5, 56, 4. 1, 37, 7. AV. 4, 6, 8. 6,

12, 3. 17, 3. 12, 1, 11. 9, 1, 18. (marutaḥ) pra vepayanti parvatān ṚV. 1,

39, 5. 52, 2. 3, 26, 4. sānuni parvatānām 1, 155, 1. 191, 9. parvatasya

pṛṣṭhe 5, 36, 2. mūrdhani 7, 70, 3. yaḥ parvatānprakupitāṁ aramṇāt 2,

12, 2. 13. 17, 5. tve hi kaṁ parvate na śritānyapracyutāni vratāni 28, 8.

yā te agne parvatasyeva dhārāsaścantī pīpayat «welche wie die Quelle

des Berges unversieglich sprudelt» 3, 57, 6. 33, 1. 4, 17, 2. 54, 5. 5, 54, 9.

85, 4. 8, 85, 5. 10, 27, 5. AV. 1, 14, 1. 3, 21, 10. varṣiṣṭhaḥ parvatānām 4,

9, 8. parvateṣu sameṣu ca 8, 7, 17. VS. 17, 1. 18, 13. ŚAT. BR. 10, 6, 4,

1. 11, 8, 1, 2. 14, 6, 8, 9. parvatā pakṣiṇa āsan KĀṬH. 36, 9.

parvatapakṣaśātana (von Indra) RAGH. 3, 42. viṣṇuḥ

parvatānāmadhipatiḥ TS. 3, 4, 5, 1. GOBH. 4, 8, 9. ubhau parvatau

dakṣiṇaścottaraśca KAUṢ. UP. in Ind. St. 1, 407. fg. M. 3, 9. 4, 46. —

mastaka 47. 60. N. 9, 21. 12, 81. mahā- R. 1, 1, 62. vindhya- 6, 22.

uttaraṁ parvatam 63, 14. 65, 12. hemakūṭaḥ kiṁpuruṣaparvataḥ ŚĀK. 99,

17. parvatānāṁ darīṣu ṚT. 1, 25. MEGH. 23. HIT. 18, 7. VARĀH. BṚH. S.

45, 91. 53, 104. vyaśīryata — naurivāsādya parvatam MBH. 7, 1242. 1331.

mahī saparvatā R. 2, 41, 18. 6, 102, 22. MĀRK. P. 53, 11. -ketava iva

BHĀG. P. 5, 16, 13. «Künstliche Berge (Haufen) von Getraide, Salz,

Safran, Zucker, Silber, Gold» u. s. w. den Brahmanen dargebracht:

parvatadāna Verz. d. B. H. No. 1218. Berge werden angerufen neben

Flüssen, Bäumen, Winden u. s. w.: śṛṇvantu no vṛṣaṇaḥ parvatāsaḥ ṚV.

3, 54, 20. 8, 18, 16. 31, 10. 10, 35, 2. 36, 1. 7, 34, 23. 35, 8. avantu mā

parvatāso dhruvāsaḥ 6, 52, 4. 46, 6. VĀLAKH. 5, 12. AV. 17, 1, 30.

Personificirt neben den Āptya, Rudra, Ṛbhu ṚV. 5, 41, 9. 8, 52, 12. 4, 34,

8. «Ein Genius des Gebirges», Parvata, zugleich als «Wolkenbeherrscher»

zu verstehen (vgl. «c.»), erscheint neben Indra ṚV. 1, 122, 3. 132, 6. 3,

53, 1. neben Savitar, den Marut und andern Göttern 4, 55, 5. 6, 49, 14. 7,

37, 8. 10, 158, 3. unter den acht Vasu HARIV. 11539. — b) «Stein,

Felsstück»: adrayaḥ parvatāḥ «die Soma-Steine» ṚV. 10, 94, 1. 3, 35, 8.

uttakṣataṁ svaryaṁ1 parvatebhyaḥ 7, 104, 4. abhi jahi rakṣasaḥ

parvatena 19. antarmṛtyuṁ dadhatāṁ parvatena 10, 18, 4. — c) «Wolke»

NAIGH. 1, 10. ya īṅkhayanti parvatāntiraḥ samudramarṇavam ṚV. 1, 19,

7. ni parvataḥ sādyaprayucchan 2, 11, 8. 7. dhūnutha dyāṁ

parvatāndāśuṣe vasu 5, 57, 5. 8, 7, 23. auch wohl 59, 11. VS. 10, 19. An

vielen Stellen ist zwischen der ersten Bedeutung und der jedenfalls viel

selteneren dritten kaum zu entscheiden; z. B. in den Schilderungen von

Indra’s Kämpfen, der sowohl «Wolken» als «Berge» spaltet, um die

Gewässer zu befreien u. s. w.; oder in den Bildern von den Marut, die auf

«Höhen» und im «Gewölk» hausen, «Berge» und «Wolken» schütteln und

zerreissen, vgl. ṚV. 1, 32, 1. 2, 12, 11. 4, 30, 14. 8, 7, 23 u.s.w. — d) Bez.

«der Zahl sieben» (wegen der «7 Hauptgebirge») SŪRYAS. 2, 37. — e)

«Baum» MED. — f) «eine Art Gemüse» MED. — g) «ein best. Fisch» MED.

= vulg. pāvdā ŚKDR. «Silurus Pabda Ham.» WILS.; vgl. parvita. — h) N. pr.

P. 4, 1, 103. a) eines zwischen Göttern und Menschen verkehrenden Ṛṣi,

Begleiters des Nārada (s. u. d. W.), Liedverfassers (mit dem patron.

Kāṇva und auch Kāśyapa) von ṚV. 8, 12. 9, 104. 105. ṚV. ANUKR. Ind. St.

3, 222. H. an. MED. ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 15, 17, 4. N. 2, 13. MBH. 1, 2048. 7011.

2, 110. 292. 7, 2138. 12, 1046. fgg. KATHĀS. 45, 348. — b) eines Sohnes

des Paurṇamāsa, eines Sohnes des Marīki von der Saṁbhūti, MĀRK. P.

52, 19. — g) eines Ministers des Königs Purūravas VIKR. 85, 17. — d)

eines Grammatikers (?) Ind. St. 5, 160; vgl. 165. fg. — e) eines Affen R.

6, 2, 34. — 2) f. ī «Fels, Stein» VS. 1, 19 (vgl. Ind. St. 3, 222). -ti in der

Parallelstelle TS. 1, 1, 6, 1. — Vgl. pārvata, pārvatāyana, pārvati.

parvata 1) h) z) N. einer der zehn auf Schüler Śaṁkarācārya’s

zurückgeführten Bettelorden, dessen Mitglieder das Wort parvata ihrem

Namen beifügen, Verz. d. Oxf. H. 227,b,16. WILSON, Sel. Works 1,202

(pā-).

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

parvata 1 I A sage who was the nephew of Nārada.

parvata 2 II It is believed that in Kṛtayuga all mountains had wings. They

flew all over the world with the swiftness of Garuḍa or Vāyu. All beings

including ṛṣis and devas lived in a state of suspense since at any moment

any mountain might fly and land down on their heads. They complained to

Indra and Indra asked the mountains to remain at one place which they

flatly refused. Indra got angry and started cutting down the wings of the

mountains with his Vajrāyudha. No mountain was able to escape from

this punishment; but Vāyubhagavān carried away his bosom friend, the

mountain Maināka, and put it in the ocean without anybody noticing it. So

Maināka alone did not lose its wings. It was this Maināka which rose from

the ocean and gave a resting point to Hanūmān, son of Vāyu, when he

took a leap from the shores of Bhārata to Laṅkā. This was but an

expression of gratitude to Vāyu whose son Hanūmān was, for the help he

had given when Indra was cutting off the wings of all mountains. (Sarga

1, Sundara Kāṇḍa, Vālmīki Rāmāyaṇa).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

parvata parvata, i. e. parvant (the original form of parvan) + a, m.

1. A mountain, Megh. 23.

2. A proper name.

— Comp. agni-, m. a volcano. amara-, and indra-, m. names of mountains.

uttara-, m. the northern ridge of mountains. jambu-, m. = jambu

2. varṣa-, m. A mountainous range supposed to separate the Varṣas,

or divisions of the globe, from each other.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

parvata a. knotty, rugged (of a mountain). —m. mountain (also fig. of a

cloud), height, hill, rock, stone, N. of sev. men, esp. of a Rishi (cf.

nārada); f. parvatī rock, stone.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

parvata par-vat-a, a. consisting of knots or ragged masses (with adri or

giri); m. mountain, hill; rock, boulder; cloud; N. of a Ṛṣi and of a minister

of Purūravas: -ka, m. N.;

-kandara, n. mountain-cave;

-dur-ga, n. impenetrable mountain;

-rāj: -a, m. king of mountains, ep. of the Himālaya;

-śi-khara, m. n. hill-top, mountain-peak;

-śre-ṣṭha, spv. best of mountains;

-agra, n. id.;

ī-kṛ, turn into a mountain;

ī-ya, a. belonging to mountains;

-īśvara, m. N.;

-upa-tyakā, f. mountain-lowland, land at the foot of a mountain-range.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

parvata pu° parva—atac parvāṇi māgāḥ suntyaspa ta vā . 1 girau amaraḥ

dānārthaṁ kalpite parvatākāre 2 dhānyādirśaladaśake 3 munibhede

kaśyapāt nāradaścaiva parvato’rundhatī tathā tasya

nāradasodaratvamuktam . mā° śā° 30 a° tu tasya

nāradabhāgineyatvamuktam tacca kapivaktraśabde 1 6 7 6 pṛ° darśitam .

kṛlpabhedādavirodhaḥ . 4 matsyabhede (pāvadā) 5 vṛkṣe 6 śākabhede ca

mediniḥ . 7 gandharvabhede bhā° ā° 187 a° . dharmasya putraṁ

sādhyāyāṁ jāte 8 devabhede matsyapu° 20 4 a° .

sumeroḥ pūrve parvatā yathā śītāktaścakramuñjaśca kulīro’śvaśca

kaṅgavān . maṇiśailo’tha vṛṣavān mahānīlo bhavācalaḥ . suvinduḥ

mandasye veṇuḥ sumeṣo nimipastathā . devaśailasya pūrveṇa

mandaraśca mahāvalāḥ sumeroḥ dakṣiṇe parvatā yathā trikūṭaḥ

śikharādriśca kaliṅgo’tha satarkukaḥ . rucakaḥ sānumāṁścaiva

tāmrako’tha viśākhavān . śvetodaraḥ samalayo basadhāraśca ratravān .

ekaśṛṅgo mahāśailo gajaśailaḥ piśācakaḥ . pañcaśailo’tha kalāso

himavāṁścānnalottamaḥ . ityete dakṣiṇe pārśve meroḥ proktā mahānalāḥ

. sumeroḥ paścime parvatā yathā mucakṣuḥ śiśiraścaiva vaidūryaḥ

piṅgalastathā . piñjaro’tha tathā bhadraḥ surasaḥ kapilo madhuḥ .

añjanaḥ kukkuṭaḥ kṛṣṇaḥ pāṇḍuraścācalottamaḥ . mahasraśisvaraścādriḥ

pāripātraḥ saśṛṅgavān . paścimena tathā merorviṣkambhāt

paścimādvahiḥ . ete’calāḥ samākhyātāḥ śṛṇuṣvātastathottarān .

sumeroruttare parvatā yathā śaṅkakūṭo’tha ṛṣabho haṁsanābhau

tathācalau . kapilendrastathā śailaḥ sānumānnīla eva ca . śataśṛṅgaḥ

svarṇaśṛṅgaḥ punnāko meghaparvataḥ . virājākhyo varāhādrirmayūrī

rucirastathā . ityete kathitā brahmanmeroruttarato nagāḥ mārkaṇḍeya

pu° .

śreṣṭhaparvatā viṁśatiryathā himavām hemakūṭaśca niṣadho

nīlaparvataḥ . śvetaśca śṛṅgabān merūrmālyavān ganghamādanaḥ .

mahendro malayaḥ sahyaḥ śuktimānṛkṣamānapi . bindhyaśca

pāripātraśca kailāso mandarastathā . lokāloko mahāṁsteṣu

tathaivottaramānasaḥ . ete viṁśatirvikhyātāḥ parvatāstasthaṣāṁvarāḥ .

girīṇāṁ sapakṣatva tacchedanakathā yathā tato’drayo jātapakṣā

viṣṇoścaiva tu māyayā . prasthitā medinīṁ tyaktvā yathāpūrva niyethitāḥ

. tatsthānamamurāṣṇāntu dhātrādiṣṭa jalārṇave . pratīcyāṁ parvatāḥ

saṣe nimamajjuryathā gajāḥ .

tatrāmurebhyaḥ śaṁsuste ādhipatya surāśrayam . tacchrucaiva surāḥ

sarve cakrurudyogamuttamam ityupakrame teṣāṁ yudgamuktvā

yudgajayānantaraṁ teṣāṁ pakṣacche dauktī yathā

dharaṇyāntu girīn sthāpya sveṣu sthāneṣu gopatiḥ . griccheda pavinā

grakṣān sarveṣāṁ bhuvicāriṇām . ekaḥ papakṣo mainākaḥ

suraistatsamaye kṛtaḥ agnipu° . parvatānāṁ sthāvarajaṅgamarūpe dve

rūṣe yathā nadyaśca parvatāḥ sarve dvirūpāśca svabhāvataḥ . toyaṁ

nadīnāṁ rūpantu śarīramaparantathā . sthāvaraṁ parvatānāntu rūpaṁ

kāyastathā’paraḥ . śuktīnāmatha kamyūnā tathaivāntargatā tanuḥ .

bahirasthisnarūpantu sarvadaiva pravartate . evaṁ jalaṁ sthābaraśca

nadīparbatayoryathā . antarvasati kāyastu satataṁnopalabhyate .

āpyāyyate sthāvareṇa śarīraṁ parvatasya tu . tathā nadīnāṁ kāyastu

toyenāpyāyyate sadā . nadīnāṁ kāmarūpitvaṁ parvatānāṁ tathaiva ca .

jagatsthityai purā viṣṇuḥ katpayāmāsa yatnataḥ . toyahānau

nadīduḥsvaṁ jāyate satataṁ dvijāḥ 1 . viśīrśo sthāvare duḥkhaṁ jāyate

girikāyagam kālikāpu° 2 2 pu° .

पर्वतः — parvataḥ Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

parvataḥ [parv-atac; parvāṇi bhāgāḥ saṁtyasya vā; cf. P. V. 2. 122 Vārt.]

(1) A mountain, hill; paraguṇaparamāṇūnparvatīkṛtya nityaṁ Bh. 2.

78; na parvatāgre nalinī prarohati Mk. 4. 17.

(2) A rock.

(3) An artificial mountain or heap.

(4) The number ‘seven’.

(5) A tree.

(6) A kind of vegetable.

— Comp.

—ariḥ an epithet of Indra.

—ātmajaḥ an epithet of the mountain Maināka.

—ātmajā an epithet of Pārvatī.

—ādhārā the earth.

—āśayaḥ a cloud.

—āśrayaḥ a fabulous animal called Śarabha, q. v.

—āśrayin m.,

—āśrayaḥ a mountaineer.

—kākaḥ a raven.

—jā a river.

—patiḥ an epithet of the Himālaya mountain.

—gocā a kind of plantain.

—rāj m.

—rājaḥ 1. a large mountain. —2. ‘the lord of mountains’, the

Himālaya mountain

—vāsin a. living in mountains. (—m.) a mountaineer. (

—nī). 1. N. of Durgā. —2. of Gāyatrī.

—stha a. situated on a hill or mountain.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

parvataḥ puṁ, (parvati pūrayatīti . parva pūraṇe + bhṛmṛdṛśiyajiparvīti .

uṇāṁ . 3 . 110 . iti atac .) yadvā, parvaṇi bhāgāḥ santyatra . pāhāḍa iti

bhāṣā .. tatparyāyaḥ . mahīdhraḥ 2 śikharī 3 kṣmābhṛt 4 ahāryaḥ 5 dharaḥ

6 adriḥ 7 gotraḥ 8 giriḥ 9 grāvā 10 acalaḥ 11 śailaḥ 12 śiloccayaḥ 13 .

ityamaraḥ . 2 . 3 . 1 .. sthāvaraḥ 14 sānumān 15 pṛthuśekharaḥ 16

dharaṇīkīlakaḥ 17 kuṭṭāraḥ 18 jīmūtaḥ 19 dhātubhṛt 20 bhūdharaḥ 21

sthiraḥ 22 kulīraḥ 23 kaṭakī 24 śṛṅgī 25 nirjharī 26 agaḥ 27 nagaḥ 28 dantī

29 . iti śabdaratnāvalī .. dharaṇīdhraḥ 39 bhūbhṛt 31 kṣitibhṛt 32

avanīdharaḥ 33 kudharaḥ 34 dharādharaḥ 35 prasthavān 36 vṛkṣavān 37 .

iti rājanirghaṇṭaḥ .. * .. sumeroḥ pūrbe parvatā yathā —

śītāntaścakramuñjaśca kulīro’śvaśca kaṅkavān .

maṇiśailo’tha vṛṣavān mahānīlo bhavācalaḥ ..

subindurmandaro veṇuḥ sumeṣo nimiṣastathā .

devaśailasya pūrbeṇa mandarasya mahācalāḥ .. * .. sumerordakṣiṇe

parvatā yathā —

trikūṭaḥ śikharādriśca kaliṅgo’tha pataṅgakaḥ .

rucakaḥ sānumāṁścaiva tāmrako’tha viśākhavān ..

śvetodaraḥ samalaśca vasudhāraśca ratnavān .

ekaśṛṅgo mahāśailo gajaśailaḥ piśācakaḥ ..

pañcaśailo’tha kailāso himavāṁścācalottamaḥ .

ityete dakṣiṇe pārśve meroḥ proktā mahācalāḥ .. sumeroḥ paścime

parvatā yathā —

sucakṣuḥ śiśiraścaiva vaidūryaḥ piṅgalastathā .

piñjaro’tha tathā bhadraḥ surasaḥ kapilo madhuḥ ..

añjanaḥ kukkuṭaḥ kṛṣṇaḥ pāṇḍuraścācalottamaḥ .

sahasraśikharaścādriḥ pāripātraḥ sa śṛṅgavān ..

paścimena tathā merorviṣkambhāt paścimādvahiḥ .

ete’calāḥ samākhyātāḥ śṛṇuṣvātastathottarān .. sumeroruttare

parvatā yathā —

śaṅkhakūṭo’tha ṛṣabho haṁsanābhau tathācalau .

kapilendrastathā śailaḥ sānumānnīla eva ca ..

śataśṛṅgaḥ svarṇaśṛṅgaḥ tunnāko meghaparvataḥ .

virājākhyo varāhādrirmayūro rucirastathā ..

ityete kathitā brahmanmeroruttarato nagāḥ .. iti mākaṇḍeyapurāṇam

.. * .. saptakulaparvatādi yathā —

sapta ye’smin mahāparvā vistṛtāḥ kulaparvatāḥ .

mahendro malayaḥ sahyaḥ śuktimānṛkṣavānapi ..

vindhyaśca pāripātraśca ityete kulaparvatāḥ .

teṣāṁ sahasraśaścānye parvatāstu samīpataḥ ..

avijñātāḥ parvavanto vipulāścitrasānavaḥ .

anye tebhyo’parijñātā hrasvāḥ svalpopajīvinaḥ ..

tairvimiśrā janapadā āryā mlecchāśca sarvaśaḥ .. iti mātsye 95

adhyāyaḥ .. * .. viṁśatiḥ śreṣṭhaparvatā yathā —

himavān hemakūṭaśca niṣadho nīlaparvataḥ .

śvetaśca bhṛṅgavān merurmālyavān gandhamādanaḥ ..

mahendro malayaḥ sahyaḥ śuktimānṛkṣavānapi .

bindhyaśca pāripātraśca kailāso mandarastathā ..

lokāloko mahāṁsteṣu tathaivottaramānasaḥ .

ete viṁśatirvikhyātāḥ parvatāstasthuṣāṁ varāḥ .. jambu

dvīpavarṣavibhājakaparvatā yathā —

laṅkādeśāddhimagirirudak hemakūṭaśca tasmāttasmāccānyo niṣadha

iti te sindhuparyantadairghyāḥ .

evaṁ siddhādudagapi purācchṛṅgavacchuklanīlā varṣāṇyeṣāṁ jaguriha

budhā antare droṇideśān .. iti siddhāntaśiromaṇiḥ .. * .. parvatānāṁ

pakṣotpattiryathā —

tato’drayo jātapakṣā viṣṇoścaiva tu māyayā .

prasthitā medinīṁ tyaktvā yathāpūrbaṁ niveśitāḥ ..

tat sthānamasurāṇāntu dhātrādiṣṭaṁ jalārṇave .

pratīcyāṁ parvatāḥ sarve nimamajjuryathā gajāḥ ..

tatrāsurebhyaḥ śaṁsuste ādhipatyaṁ surāśrayam .

tacchratvaivāsurāḥ sarve cakrurudyogamuttamam .. * ..

yuddhajayānantaraṁ teṣāṁ pakṣocchedo yathā —

dharaṇyāntu girīn syāpya sveṣu sthāneṣu goḥpatiḥ .

ciccheda pavinā pakṣān sarveṣāṁ bhuvi cāriṇām ..

ekaḥ sapakṣo mainākaḥ suraistatsamaye kṛtaḥ .. ityagnipurāṇam .. *

.. parvatānāṁ sthāvarajaṅgamarūpe yathā —

nadyaśca parvatāḥ sarve dvirūpāśca svabhāvataḥ .

toyaṁ nadīnāṁ rūpantu śarīramaparantathā ..

sthāvaraṁ parvatānāntu rūpaṁ kāyastathāparaḥ .

śuktīnāmatha kambūnāṁ tathaivāntargatā tanūḥ ..

vahirasthisvarūpantu sarvadaiva pravartate .

evaṁ jalaṁ sthāvaraśca nadīparvatayostathā ..

antarvasati kāyastu satataṁ nopapadyate .

āpyāyyate sthāvareṇa śarīraṁ parvatasya tu ..

tathā nadīnāṁ kāyastu toyenāpyāyyate sadā .

nadīnāṁ kāmarūpitvaṁ parvatānāntathaiva ca ..

jagatsthityoḥ purā viṣṇuḥ kalpayāmāsa yatnataḥ .

toyahānau nadīduḥkhañjāyate satatandijāḥ ..

viśīrṇe sthāvare duḥkhaṁ jāyate girikāyagam .. iti kālikāpurāṇe 22

adhyāyaḥ .. * .. ataḥ paraṁ parvateṣu devānāmavakāśā vaṁrṇyante .

tatra yo’sau śāntākhyaḥ parvatastasyopari mahendrasya krīḍāsthānaṁ

tatra devarājasya pārijātakavṛkṣavanam . tastha pūrbapārśve kuñjaro

nāma giriḥ tasyopari dānavānāmaṣṭau purāṇi ca . tathā vajraketuparvate

rākṣasānāmanekāni purāṇi te ca nāmnā nīlakāḥ kāmarūpiṇaḥ mahānīle ca

śailendre purāṇi pañcadaśasahasrāṇi kinnarāṇāṁ khyātāni tatra

devatāścandrādayo rājānaḥ pañcadaśa kinnarāṇāṁ garvitāḥ tāni

sauvarṇāni vilapraveśanāni ca purāṇi candrodaye ca parvatavare

nāgānāmadhivāsaḥ te ca vilapraveśāseviteṣu vainateyaviṣayāvartino

vyavasthitānurāge ca dānavendrā vyavasthitā veṇuvatyapi

vidyādharapuratrayaṁ triṁśadyojanaśatavistīrṇamekaikaṁ tāvadāyataṁ

ulūkaromasamamahāvetrādayaśca rājāno vidyādharāṇāñca ekaike ca

śailarājani svayameva garuḍo vyavasthitaḥ . kuñjare tu parvatavare

nityaṁ paśupatiḥ sthitaḥ vṛṣabhāṅko mahādevaḥ śaṅkaro yogināṁ

prabhuḥ anekaguṇabhūtakoṭisahasraparivāro bhagavānādipuruṣo

vyavasthitaḥ . vasudhāre cāyuṣmatāṁ vasūnāñca samāvāsaḥ

vasudhāraratnadhārayormūrdhni aṣṭau sapta ca saṁkhyayā purāṇi

vasusaptarṣīṇāñca . ekaśṛṅge ca parvatottame prajāpateḥ sthānaṁ

caturvaktrasya brahmaṇaḥ . gajaparvate ca mahābhūtaparivṛtā

svayameva bhagavatī tiṣṭhati . vasudhāre ca parvatavare

munisiddhavidyādharāṇāmāyatanaṁ caturaśītyaparapuryo

mahāprākāratoraṇāḥ tatra cānekapavvatā nāma gandharvā yuddhaśālino

vasanti teṣāñcādhipatirdevo rājarājaikapiṅgalaḥ . surarākṣasāḥ pañcakūṭe

dānavāḥ śataśṛṅge yakṣāṇāṁ puraśatam . prabhedakasya paścimena

devadānavasiddhādīnāṁ purāṇi tasya girermūrdhni mahatī somaśilā

tiṣṭhati tasyāñca parvaṇi parvaṇi somaḥ svayamevāvatarati .

tasyaivottarapārśve trikūṭaṁ nāma tatra brahmā tiṣṭhati kvacittatra ca

vahnyāyatanaṁ tatra mūrtimān vahnirupāsyate devaiḥ . uttare ca

śṛṅgākṣe parvatavare devatānāmāyatanāni pūrbeṇa nārāyaṇasyāyatanaṁ

madhye brahmaṇaḥ śaṅkarasya ca paścime tatra yakṣādīnāṁ kānicit

purāṇi . tasya cottaratīre jātucchamahāparvate triṁśadyojanamaṇḍalaṁ

nandajaṁ nāma sarastatra nando nāma nāgarājo vasati

śataśīrṣapracaṇḍa iti . ityete’ṣṭau devaparvatā vijñeyāḥ tenānukrameṇa

hemarajataratnavaidūryamanaḥśilādivarṇāḥ . ityañca pṛthvī

lakṣakoṭiśatānekasaṁkhyātā pūrṇā teṣu ca siddhavidyādharāṇāṁ nilayāḥ

. tadyathā meroḥ pārśvataḥ keśaravalayālabālaṁ siddhaloketi kīrtyate

iyañca pṛthvī padmākāreṇa vyavasthitā eṣa sarvapurāṇeṣu kramaḥ

sāmānyaḥ pratipādyate . iti varāhapurāṇam .. * ..

himālayādiparvatavāsino yathā —

rakṣaḥpiśācā yakṣāśca sarve haimavatāstu te .

hemakūṭe tu gandharvā vijñeyāścāpsarogaṇāḥ ..

sarve nāgāśca niṣadhe śeṣavāsukitakṣakāḥ .

mahāmerau trayastriṁśat krīḍante yājñikāḥ surāḥ ..

nīle tu vaidūryamaye siddhā brahmarṣayo’vasan .

daityānāṁ dānavānāñca śvetaparvata ucyate ..

śṛṅgavān parvataśreṣṭhaḥ pitṝṇāṁ pratisañcaraḥ .

ityetāni mayoktāni nava varṣāṇi bhāgaśaḥ .. iti mātsye 95 adhyāyaḥ ..

* .. atha parvatanadījalaguṇāḥ .

himavatprabhavā yāśca jalaṁ tāsvamṛtopamam .

pāripātrabhāvā yāśca bindhyarkṣaprabhavāśca yāḥ ..

śirohṛdrogakuṣṭhānāṁ tā hetuḥ ślīpadasya ca .

candrārkakarasaṁspṛṣṭaṁ vāyunāsphālitāṁ muhuḥ ..

parvatopari yadbāri samaṁ paurandareṇa tat .

tasyānuguṇamuddiṣṭaṁ śailaprasravaṇodbhavam ..

lekhanaṁ dīpanaṁ rūkṣaṁ kiñcidvātaprakopaṇam .. iti rājavallabhaḥ ..

* .. parvate varṇanīyāni yathā —

śaile meghauṣadhīdhātuvaṁśakinnaranirjharāḥ .

śṛṅgapādaguhāratnavanajīvādyupatyakāḥ .. iti kavikalpalatā .. * .. atha

kailāsaparvatavarṇanam .

madhye himavataḥ pṛṣṭhe kailāso nāma parvataḥ .

tasminnidhipatiḥ śrīmān kuveraḥ saha rākṣasaiḥ ..

apsaraḥsahito rājā modate hyalakādhipaḥ .

kailāsapādasammūtaṁ puṇyaṁ śītajalaṁ śubham ..

mandodakaṁ nāma saraḥ payastu dadhisannibham .

tasmāt prabhavate divyā nadī mandākinī śubhā ..

divyañca candanantatra tasyāstīre mahadbanam .

prāguttareṇa kailāsaṁ divyaṁ saugandhikaṁ girim ..

sarvadhātumayaṁ divyaṁ śabalaṁ parvataṁ prati .

candraprabho nāma giriḥ śupubhe ratnasannibhaḥ ..

tatsamīpe saro divyamacchodannāma viśrutam .

tasmāt prabhavate divyā nadī hyacchodakā śubhā ..

tasyāstīre vanaṁ divyaṁ mahaccaitrarathaṁ śubham .

tasmin girau nivasati maṇibhadraḥ sahānugaḥ ..

yakṣasenāpatiḥ krūrairguhyakaiḥ parivāritaḥ .

puṇyā mandākinī caiva nadī hyacchodakā śubhā ..

mahīmaṇḍalamadhye tu praviṣṭā tu mahodadhim .

kailāsāddakṣiṇaprācyāṁ śivaṁ sarvauṣadhiṁ girim .

manaḥśilāmayaṁ divyaṁ śabalaṁ parvataṁ prati ..

lohito hemaśṛṅgastu giriḥ sūryaprabho mahān .

tasya pāde mahaddivyaṁ lohitaṁ sumahat saraḥ ..

tasmāt prabhavate puṇyo lohitaśca nado mahān .

devāraṇyaṁ viśokañca tasya tīre mahadvanam ..

tasmin girau nivasati yakṣo maṇidharo balī .

saumyaiḥ sa dhārmikaiścaiva guhyakaiḥ parivāritaḥ .. * ..

kailāsāt paścimodīcyāṁ kakudmānoṣadhīgiriḥ ..

kakudmati ca rudrasya cotpattistrikakudminaḥ .

tadañcanaṁ traikakudaṁ śailaṁ trikakudaṁ prati ..

sarvadhātumayastatra sumahadvaidyuto giriḥ .

tasya pāde mahaddivyaṁ mānasaṁ siddhasevitam ..

tasmāt prabhavate puṇyā sarayūrlokapāvanī .

tasyāstīre vanaṁ divyaṁ vaibhrājannāma viśrutam ..

kuverānucarastasmin prahetitanayo balī .

nāmnā vai brahmadhāmeti rākṣaso’nantavikramaḥ .. * ..

kailāsāt paścimāmāśāṁ divyaḥ sarvauṣadhirgiriḥ .

aruṇaḥ parvataśreṣṭho rukmadhātuvibhūṣitaḥ ..

bhavasya dayitaḥ śrīmān parvato hemasannibhaḥ .

śātakaumbhamayairdivyaiḥ śilājālaiḥ samantataḥ ..

śatasaṁkhyaistāpanīyaiḥ śṛṅgairdivamivollikhan .

yuktavān sumahaddivyairdurgaśailo mahocchritaḥ ..

tasmin girau nivasati girīśo dhūmralohitaḥ ..

tasya pāde mahaddivyaṁ saraḥ kāñcanabālukam ..

tasya pādāt prabhavati śailodaṁ nāma tat saraḥ .

tasmāt prabhavate puṇyā nadī śailodakā śubhā ..

sā vaṅkṣuśītayormadhye prayiṣṭhā paścimodadhim .

abhyuttareṇa kailāsaṁ śivaṁ sarvauṣadhiṁ girim .

gaurantu parvataśreṣṭhaṁ haritālamayaṁ prati .

hiraṇyaśṛṅgaḥ sumahān divyauṣadhimayo giriḥ ..

tasya pāde mahaddivyaṁ saraḥ kāñcanabālukam .

ramyaṁ bindusaro nāma yatra rājā bhagīrathaḥ ..

gaṅgārthe sa tu rājarṣiruvāsa bahulāḥ samāḥ .

divaṁ yāsyanti me pūrbe gaṅgātoyapariplutāḥ ..

tatra tripathagā devī prathamantu pratiṣṭhitā .. iti mātsye 101

adhyāyaḥ .. atha daśadhā kṛtrimaparvatadānam . prathamo dhānyaśailaḥ

syāddbitīyo lavaṇācalaḥ . guḍācalastṛtīyastuṁ caturtho hemaparvataḥ ..

pañcamastilaśailaḥ syāt ṣaṣṭhaḥ kārpāsaparvataḥ . saptamo

ghṛtaśailaśca ratnaśailastathāṣṭamaḥ .. rājato navamastadbaddaśamaḥ

śarkarācalaḥ . vakṣye vidhānameteṣāṁ yathāvadanupūrbaśaḥ .. ayane

viṣuve puṇye vyatīpāte dinakṣaye . śuklapakṣe tṛtīyāyāmuparāge

śaśikṣaye .. vivāhotsavayajñeṣu dvādaśyāmathavā punaḥ . śuklāyāṁ

pañcadaśyāṁ vā puṣyarkṣe vā vidhānataḥ .. dhānyaśailādayo deyā

yathāśāstraṁ vijānatā . tīrthe vāyatane vāpi goṣṭhe vā bhavanāṅgane ..

maṇḍapaṁ kārayedbhaktyā caturasramudaṅmukham .

prāgudakplavanañcaiva prāṅmukhaṁ vā vidhānataḥ ..

gomayenānuliptāyāṁ bhūmāvāstīrya vai kuśān . tanmadhye parvataṁ

kuryādbiṣkambhaparvatānvitam .. dhānyadroṇasahasreṇa

bhavedgiririhottamaḥ . madhyamaḥ pañcaśatikaḥ kaniṣṭhaḥ syāttribhiḥ

śataiḥ .. merurmahābrīhimayastumadhye suvarṇavṛkṣatrayasaṁyutaḥ

syāt . pūrbeṇa muktāphalavajrayukto yāmyena gomedakapuṣparāgaiḥ ..

paścācca gārutmatanīlaratnaiḥ saumyena vaidūryasarojarāgaiḥ .

śrīkhaṇḍakhaṇḍairabhitaḥ pravālalatānvitaḥ śuktiśilātalaḥ syāt ..

brahmātha viṣṇurbhagavān murārirdivākaro’pyatra hiraṇmayaḥ syāt .

mūrdhanyavasthānamamatsareṇa kāryantvaneke ca punardivīśāḥ ..

catvāri śṛṅgāṇi ca rājatāni nitambabhāgeṣvapi rājataḥ syāt .

tathekṣuvaṁśāvṛtakandarastu ghṛtodakaprasravaṇaśca dikṣu ..

śuklāmbarāṇyambu dharāvalī syāt pūrbeṇa nīlāni ca dakṣiṇena . vāsāṁsi

paścādatha karvurāṇi raktāṇi caivottarato ghanālī ..

raupyānmahendrapramukhānathāṣṭau saṁsthāpya lokādhipatīn krameṇa .

nānāphalālī ca samantataḥ syānmanoramaṁ mālyavilepanañca ..

vitānakañcopari pañcavarṇamamlānapuṣpābharaṇaṁ sitaṁ vā . itthaṁ

niveśyāmaraśailamagryamatastu viṣkambhagirīn krameṇa ..

turīyabhāgeṇa caturdiśañca saṁsthāpayet puṣpavilepanāḍhyān .. pūrbeṇa

mandaramanekaphalāvalībhiryuktaṁ yavaiḥ

kanakabhadrakadambacihnam . kāmena kāñcanamayena

virājamānamākārayet kusumavastravilepanāḍhyam ..

kṣīrāruṇodasarasātha vanena caiva raupyeṇa śaktighaṭitena virājamānam

. yāmyena gandhamadanaśca niveśanīyo godhūmasañcayamayaḥ

kaladhautajo vā .. haimena yakṣapatinā hṛtamānasena vastraiśca

rājatavanena ca saṁyutaḥ syāt . paścāttilācalamanekasugandhipuṣpaṁ

sauvarṇapippalahiraṇmayahaṁsayuktam .. ākārayedrajatapuṣpavanena

tadvadvastrānvitaṁ dadhisitodasarastathāgre . saṁsthāpya taṁ

vipulaśailamathottareṇa śailaṁ supārśvamapi tāmramayaṁ suvastram ..

puṣpaiśca hemavaṭapādapaśekharantamākārayet

kanakadhenuvirājamānam . mākṣīkabhadrasarasā ca vanena

tadvadraupyeṇa bhāsvaravatā ca yutaṁ vidhāya .. homaścaturbhiratha

vedapurāṇavidbhirdāntairanindyacaritākṛtibhirdvijendraiḥ . pūrbeṇa

hastamitamatra vidhāya kuṇḍaṁ kāryantilairyavaghṛtena samitkuśaiśca ..

rātrau ca jāgaramanuddhatagītatūryairāvāhanañca kathayāmi

śiloccayānām . tvaṁ sarvadevagaṇadhāmanidhe !

viruddhamasmadgṛheṣvamaraparbata ! nāśayāśu .. kṣemaṁ vidhatsva

kuru śāntimanuttamāṁ naḥ saṁpūjitaḥ paramabhaktimatā mayā hi ..

tvameva bhagavānīśo brahmā viṣṇurdivākaraḥ .

mūrtāmūrtajagadbījastvaṁ naḥ pāhi sanātanaḥ .. yasmāttvaṁ

lokapālānāṁ viśvamūrteśca mandiram . rudrādityavasūnāñca

tasmācchāntiṁ prayaccha me .. yasmādaśūnyamamarairnārībhiśca

śirastava . tasmānmāmuddharāśeṣaduḥkhasaṁsārasāgarāt ..

evamabhyarcya taṁ meruṁ mandarañcābhipūjayet .

yasmāccaitrarathena tvaṁ bhadrāśve ca viśeṣataḥ . śobhase mandara !

kṣipramatastuṣṭikaro bhava .. yasmāccūḍāmaṇirjambudbīpe tvaṁ

gandhamādana ! . gandharvavanaśobhāvāṁstataḥ kīrtirdṛḍhāstu me ..

yasmāttvaṁ ketumālena vaibhrājena vanena ca . hiraṇmayaśca

śikharastasmāt puṣṭirdhruvāstu me .. uttaraiḥ kurubhiryasmāt sāvitreṇa

vanena ca . supārśva ! rājase nityamataḥ śrīrakṣayāstu me ..

evamāmantrya tān sarvān prabhāte vimale punaḥ . snātvātha gurave

dadyānmadhyamaṁ parvatottamam .. viṣkambhān

parvatāndadyādṛtvigbhyaḥ kramaśo mune ! . gāvo

deyāścaturviṁśadathavā daśa nārada ! .. śaktitaḥ sapta cāṣṭau vā pañca

dadyādaśaktimān . ekāpi gurave deyā kapilātha payasvinī .

parvatānāmaśeṣāṇāmeṣa eva vidhiḥ smṛtaḥ .. ta eva pūjane mantrāsta

evopaskarāḥ smṛtāḥ . grahāṇāṁ lokapālānāṁ brahmādīnāñca sarvadā ..

svamantreṇaiva sarveṣu homaḥ śaileṣu paṭhyate . upavāsī

bhavennityamaśaktau naktamiṣyate .. vidhānaṁ sarvaśailānāṁ kramaśaḥ

śṛṇu nārada ! . dānakāle ca ye mantrāḥ parvateṣu ca yat phalam .. annaṁ

brahma yataḥ proktamannaṁ prāṇāḥ prakīrtitāḥ . annādbhavanti bhūtāni

jagadannena vartate .. annameva yato lakṣmīrannameva janārdanaḥ .

dhānyaparvatarūpeṇa pāhi tasmānnagottam ! .. anena vidhinā yastu

dadyāddhānyamayaṁ girim . manvantaraśataṁ sāgraṁ devaloke

mahīyate .. apsarogaṇagandharvairākīrṇena virājitaḥ . vimānena divaḥ

pṛṣṭhamāyāti surasevitam .. tataḥ karmakṣaye rājyamāpnotīha na

saṁśayaḥ .. 1 .. athātaḥ saṁpravakṣyāmi lavaṇācalamuttamam .

yatpradātā naro lokaṁ prāpnoti śivasaṁyutam .. uttamaḥ ṣoḍaśadroṇaḥ

kartavyo lavaṇācalaḥ . madhyamaḥ syāttadardhena caturbhiradhamaḥ

smṛtaḥ .. vittahīno yathāśaktyā droṇādūrdhvantu kārayet . caturthāṁśena

viṣkambhān parvatān kārayet pṛthak .. vidhānaṁ pūrbavat kuryāt

brahmādīnāñca sarvadā . tadvaddhematanūn sarvān lokapālānniveśayet ..

sarāṁsi kāmadevādīṁstadvaccātra niveśayet . kuryājjāgaramatrāpi

dānamantraṁ nibodhata .. saubhāgyarasasaṁbhūto yato’yaṁ lavaṇo

rasaḥ . tathātmakatvena ca māṁ pāhi pāpānnagottama ! ..

yasmādannarasāḥ sarve sotkaṭā lavaṇaṁ vinā . priyaśca śivayornityaṁ

tasmācchāntiprado bhava .. viṣṇudehasamudbhūto

yasmādārogyavardhanaḥ . tasmāt parvatarūpeṇa pāhi saṁsārasāgarāt ..

anena vidhinā yastu dadyāllavaṇaparvatam . umāloke vaset kalpaṁ tato

yāti parāṁ gatim .. 2 .. ataḥ paraṁ pravakṣyāmi guḍaparvatamuttamam .

yatpradānānnaraḥ svargamāpnoti surapūjitaḥ .. uttamo

daśabhirbhārairsadhyamaḥ pañcabhirmataḥ . tribhirbhāraiḥ kaniṣṭhaḥ

syāttadardhenālpavittavān .. tadvadāmantraṇaṁ pūjāṁ

haimavṛkṣasurārcanam . viṣkambhaparvatāstadvat sarāṁsi vanadevatāḥ

.. homajāgaraṇantadvat lokapālādhivāsanam . dhānyaparvatavat

kuryādimaṁ mantramudīrayet .. yathā deveṣu viśvātmā pravaro’yaṁ

janārdanaḥ . sāmavedastu vedānāṁ mahādevastu yoginām .. praṇavaḥ

sarvamantrāṇāṁ nārīṇāṁ pārvatī yathā . tathā rasānāṁ pravaraḥ

sadaivekṣuraso mataḥ .. mama tasmāt parāṁ lakṣīṁ guḍaparvata ! dehi

vai . yasmāt saubhāgyadāyinyā bhrātā tvaṁ guḍaparvata ! .. nivāsastvaṁ

hi pārvatyāstasmānmāṁ pāhi sarvadā . anena vidhinā yastu

dadyādguḍamayaṁ girim .. pūjyamānaḥ sagandharvairgaurīloke mahīyate

. punaḥ kalpaśatānte tu saptadvīpādhipo bhavet .. āyurārogyasampannaḥ

śatrubhiścāparājitaḥ .. 3 .. atha pāpaharaṁ vakṣye

suvarṇācalamuttamam . yasya pradānādbhuvanaṁ vairiñcaṁ yāti

mānavaḥ .. uttamaḥ palasāhasro madhyamaḥ pañcabhiḥ śataiḥ .

tadardhenādhamastadbadalpavitto’pi śaktitaḥ .. dadyādekapalādūrdhvaṁ

yathāśaktyā vimatsaraḥ . ghānyaparvatavat sarvaṁ

vidadhyānmunipuṅgava ! .. viṣkambhaśailāṁstadvacca ṛtvigbhyaḥ

pratipādayet . namasta brahmabījāya brahmagarbhāya vai namaḥ ..

yasmādanantaphaladastasmāt pāhi śiloccaya ! . yasmādagnerapatyaṁ

tvaṁ tasmādratnaṁ jagatpate ! .. hemaparvatarūpeṇa tasmāt pāhi

nagottama ! .. anena vidhinā yastu dadyāt kanakaparvatam .. sa yāti

paramaṁ brahmalokamānandakārakam . taca kalpaśatantiṣṭhettato yāti

parāṁ gatim .. 4 .. ataḥ paraṁ pravakṣyāmi tilaśailaṁ vidhānataḥ .

yatpradānānnaro yāti viṣṇulokamanuttamam .. uttamo daśabhirdroṇaiḥ

pañcabhirmadhyamo mataḥ . tribhiḥ kaniṣṭho viprendra ! tilaśailaḥ

prakīrtitaḥ .. pūrbavaccāparaṁ sarvaṁ viṣkambhaparvatādikam .

dānamantraṁ pravakṣyāmi yathāvanmunisattam ! .. yasmānmadhuvadhe

viṣṇordehāt svedasamudbhavāḥ . tilāḥ kuśāśca samidhastasmācchāntyai

bhavantviha .. havyakavyeṣu yasmācca tilā evābhirakṣaṇam .

bhavāduddhara śailendra ! tilācala ! namo’stu te .. ityāmantrya ca yo

dadyāttilācalamanuttamam . sa vaiṣṇavaṁ padaṁ yāti

punarāvṛttidurlabham .. dīrghāyuṣṭvamavāpnoti puttrapauttraiśca

mānavaḥ . pitṛbhirdevagandharvaiḥ pūjyamāno divaṁ vrajet .. 5 ..

athātaḥ saṁpravakṣyāmi kārpāsācalamuttamam . yatpradānānnaro

nityamāpnoti paramaṁ padam ..

kārpāsaparvatastadvadviṁśadbhārairihottamaḥ . daśabhirmadhyamaḥ

proktaḥ kaniṣṭhaḥ pañcabhirmataḥ .. bhāreṇālpadhano

dadyādbittaśāṭhyena varjitaḥ . dhānyaparvatavat sarvamāsādya

munipuṅgava ! .. prabhātāyāntu śarvaryāṁ dadyādidamudīrayet .

tvamevāvaraṇaṁ yasmāllokānāmiha sarvadā .. kārpāsādre

namastasmādaghaughadhvaṁsano bhava . iti kārpāsaśailendraṁ yo

dadyāt śarvasannidhau .. rudraloke vaset kalpaṁ tato rājā bhavediha .. *

. 6 . athātaḥ saṁpravakṣyāmi ghṛtācalamanuttamam . tejo’mṛtamayaṁ

divyaṁ mahāpātakanāśanam .. viṁśatyā ghṛtakumbhānāmuttamaḥ

syādghṛtācalaḥ . daśabhirmadhyamaḥ proktaḥ pañcabhistvavaraḥ smṛtaḥ

.. alpavitto’pi kurvīta dvābhyāmiha vidhānataḥ . viṣkambhān

parvatāṁstadbaccaturbhāgena kalpayet .. śālitaṇḍulapātrāṇi kumbhopari

niveśayet . kārayet saṁhṛtānuccān yathāśobhaṁ vidhānataḥ .. veṣṭayet

śuklavāsobhirikṣudaṇḍaphalādikaiḥ . dhānyaparvatavat sarvaṁ

vidhānamiha paṭhyate .. adhivāsanapūrbantu tadbaddhomasurārcanam .

prabhātāyāntu śarvaryāṁ gurave ca nivedayet ..

viṣkambhaparvatāṁstadvadṛtvigbhyaḥ śāntamānasaḥ .

saṁyogādghṛtamutpannaṁ yasmādamṛtatejasoḥ ..

tasmādghṛtārcirviśvātmā prīyatāmatra śaṅkaraḥ . yasmāttejomayaṁ

brahma ghṛte tacca vyavasthitam .. ghṛtaparvatarūpeṇa tasmānmāṁ pāhi

bhūdhara ! . anena vidhinā dadyādghṛtācalamanuttamam ..

mahāpātakayukto’pi lokamāyāti śāṅkaram . haṁsasārasayuktena

kiṅkiṇījālamālinā .. vimānenāpsarobhiśca siddhavidyādharairvṛtaḥ . viharet

pitṛbhiḥ sārdhaṁ yāvadāhūtasaṁplavam .. 7 .. ataḥ paraṁ pravakṣyāmi

ratnācalamanuttamam . muktāphalasahasreṇa parvataḥ syādanuttamaḥ

.. madhyamaḥ pañcaśatikastriśatairavaraḥ smṛtaḥ . caturthāṁśena

viṣkambhāḥ parvatāḥ syuḥ samantataḥ .. pūrbeṇa

vajragomedairdakṣiṇenendranīlakaiḥ . puṣparāgayutaiḥ kāryo

vidbadbhirgandhamādanaḥ .. vaidūryavidrumaiḥ paścāt saṁmiśro

vipulo’calaḥ . padmarāgaiḥ sasauvarṇairuttareṇa tu vinyaset ..

dhānyaparvatavat sarvamatrāpi parikalpayet . tadvadāvāhanaṁ kṛtvā

vṛkṣān devāṁśca kāñcanān .. pūjayed puṣpapānīyaiḥ prabhāte cātha

pūrbavat . pūrbavadguru-ṛtvigbhyaḥ phalamantrānudīrayet .. yathā

devagaṇāḥ sarve sarvaratneṣvavasthitāḥ . tvañca ratnamayo nityamataḥ

pāhi mahācala ! .. yasmādratnapradānena tuṣṭiṁ prakurute hareḥ .

sadānandapradānena tasmānnaḥ pāhi parvata ! .. anena vidhinā yastu

dadyādratnamahāgirim . sa yāti vaiṣṇavaṁ lokamamareśvarapūjitaḥ ..

yāvat kalpaśataṁ sāgraṁ vāsaśceha narādhipa ! . rūpārogyaguṇopetaḥ

saptadvīpādhipo bhavet .. brahmahatyādikaṁ kiñcidyadatrāmutra vā

kṛtam . tat sarvaṁ nāśamāyāti girirvajrahato yathā .. 8 .. ataḥ paraṁ

pravakṣyāmi raupyācalamanuttamam . yatpradānānnaro yāti somalokaṁ

dvijottam ! .. daśabhiḥ palasāhasrairuttamo rajatācalaḥ .

pañcabhirmadhyamaḥ proktastadardhenāvaraḥ smṛtaḥ .. aśaktau

viṁśaterūrdhvaṁ kārayet śaktitaḥ sadā .

viṣkambhaparvatāṁstadvatturīyāṁśena kalpayet .. pūrbavadrājatān

kuryānmandarādīn vidhānataḥ . kaladhautamayāṁstatra lokeśān

racayedbudhaḥ .. brahmaviṣṇvarkavat kāryo nitambo’tra hiraṇmayaḥ .

rājataṁ syādyadanyeṣāṁ sarvantadiha kāñcanam .. śeṣañca pūrbavat

kuryāddhomajāgaraṇādikam . pradadyāttaṁ prabhāte tu gurave

raupyaparvatam .. viṣkambhaśailānṛtvigbhyaḥ pūjyavastravibhūṣaṇaiḥ .

imaṁ mantraṁ paṭhan dadyāddarbhapāṇirvimatsaraḥ .. pitṝṇāṁ

vallabhaṁ yasmādviṣṇorvā śaṅkarasya ca . rajataṁ pāhi tasmānnaḥ

śokasaṁsārasāgarāt . itthaṁ niveśya yo dadyādrajatācalamuttamam .

gavāmayutadānasya phalaṁ prāpnoti mānavaḥ .. somaloke sa

gandharvaiḥ kinnarāpsarasāṅgaṇaiḥ . pūjyamāno vasedvidvān

yāvadāhūtasaṁplavam .. 9 .. athātaḥ saṁpravakṣyāmi

śarkarāśailamuttamam . yasya pradānādviṣṇvarkarudrāstuṣyanti sarvadā

.. aṣṭabhiḥ śarkarābhārairuttamaḥ syānmahācalaḥ . caturbhirmadhyamaḥ

prokto bhārābhyāmadhamaḥ smṛtaḥ .. sārdhabhāreṇa śailantu yaḥ kuryāt

svalpavittavān . viṣkambhaparvatān kuryātturīyāṁśena mānavaḥ ..

dhānyaparvatavat sarvamāsādya merusaṁyutam . merorupari tadvacca

sthāpyaṁ hematarutrayam .. mandāraḥ pārijātaśca tṛtīyaḥ kalpapādapaḥ

. etadvṛkṣatrayaṁ mūrdhni sarveṣvapi niveśayet .. haricandanasantānau

pūrbapaścimabhāgayoḥ . niveśyau sarvaśaileṣu viśeṣāccharkarācale ..

mandare kāmadevastu pratyagvaktraḥ sadā bhavet .

gandhamādanaśṛṅgeṣu dhanadaḥ syādudaṅmukhaḥ .. prāṅmukho

vedamūrtiśca haṁsaḥ syādvipulācale . haimī supārśvasurabhī

dakṣiṇābhimukhī bhavet .. dhānyaparvatavat sarvamāvāhanamakhādikam

. kṛtvātha gurave dadyānmadhyamaṁ parvatottamam . ṛtvigbhyaśca

naraḥ śailānimānmantrānudīrayet .. saubhāgyāmṛtasāro’yaṁ paramaḥ

śarkarāyutaḥ . tat sadānandakārī tvaṁ bhava śailendra ! sarvadā ..

amṛtaṁ pibatāṁ ye tu nipeturbhuvi śīkarāḥ . devānāntatsamuttho’yaṁ

pāhi naḥ śarkarācala ! .. manobhavadhanurmadhyādudbhūtā śarkarā

yataḥ . tanmayo’si mahāśaila ! pāhi saṁsārasāgarāt .. yo dadyāt

śarkarāśailamanena vidhinā naraḥ . sarvapāpavinirmuktaḥ prayāti

śivamandiram .. candrādityapratīkāśamadhiruhyānujīvibhiḥ . sahaiva

yānamātiṣṭhet sa tu viṣṇupracoditaḥ .. tataḥ kalpaśatānte tu

saptadvīpādhipo bhavet . āyurārogyasampanno yāvajjanmārvudatrayam ..

bhojanaṁ śaktitaḥ kuryāt sarvaśaileṣvamatsaraḥ .

sarvatrākṣāralavaṇamaśnīyāttadanujñayā . parvatopaskarān sarvān

prāpayet brāhmaṇālayam .. 10 .. iti mātsye 77 adhyāyaḥ .. devarṣiviśeṣaḥ

. yathā —

kaśyapānnāradaścaiva parvato’rundhatī tathā .. ityagnipurāṇam ..

(yathāca, mahābhārate . 3 . 93 . 25 .

lomaśasyopasaṁgṛhya pādau dvaipāyanasya ca .

nāradasya ca rājendra ! devarṣeḥ parvatasya ca ..) matsyaviśeṣaḥ .

pāvdā iti bhāṣā . asya guṇāḥ . vāyunāśitvam . snigdhatvam .

balaśukrakāritvañca . iti rājavallabhaḥ .. vṛkṣaḥ . śākabhedaḥ . iti medinī .

te, 126 .. (sannyāsiviśeṣaḥ . sa tu śaṅkarācāryaśiṣyasya

maṇḍanamiśrasya śiṣyaviśeṣaḥ . yathā, prāṇatoṣiṇyāṁ

avadhūtaprakaraṇe .

vaset parvatamūleṣu prauḍho yo dhyānadhāraṇāt .

sārātsāraṁ vijānāti parvataḥ parikīrtitaḥ ..)

भूः — bhūḥ Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

bhūḥ f. [bhū-kvip]

(1) The earth (opp. aṁtarīkṣa or svarga); divaṁ marutvāniva

bhokṣyate bhuvaṁ R. 3. 4, 18. 4; Me. 18; mattebhakuṁbhadalane bhuvi

saṁti śūrāḥ

(2) Earth as one of the nine substances.

(3) The universe, globe.

(4) Ground, floor; prāsādoparibhūmayaḥ Mu. 3; maṇibhayabhuvaḥ

(prāsādāḥ) Me. 64.

(5) Land, landed property.

(6) A place, site, region, plot of ground; kānanabhuvi, upavanabhuvi

&c.

(7) Matter, subjectmatter.

(8) A symbolical expression for the number ‘one’.

(9) The base of a geometrical figure. (10) A sacrificial fire.

(11) The act of becoming, arising.

(12) The first of the three Vyāhṛtis or mystic syllables (representing

the earth) repeated by every Brāhmaṇa at the commencement of his

daily Sandhyā.

— Comp.

—uttamaṁ gold.

—kadaṁbaḥ a kind of Kadamba tree.

—kaṁpaḥ an earthquake.

—karṇaḥ the diameter of the earth.

—kaśyapaḥ an epithet of Vasudeva, Kṛṣṇa’s father.

—kākaḥ 1. a kind of heron. —2. the curlew. —3. a kind of pigeon.

—keśaḥ the fig-tree.

—keśā a female demon, demoness.

—kṣit m. a hog.

—garaṁ a particular poison.

—garbhaḥ 1. N. of Viṣṇu. —2. an epithet of Bhavabhūti.

—gṛhaṁ, —gehaṁ a cellar, a room underground.

—golaḥ the terrestrial globe; bhūgolamudbibhrate Gīt. 1. -vidyā

geography.

—ghanaḥ the body.

—cakraṁ the equator.

—cara a. moving or living on land. (

—raḥ) 1. any landanimal (opp. jalavara). —2. an epithet of Śiva.

—caryā, —chāyā, —chāyaṁ

(1) earth’s shadow (vulgarly called Rāhu). —2. darkness. —jaṁtuḥ 1 a

kind of earthworm. —2. an elephant. —jaṁbuḥ —būḥ f. wheat. —talaṁ the

surface of the earth. —tṛṇaḥ, —bhūstṛṇaḥ a kind of fragrant grass —dāraḥ

a hog. —devaḥ —suraḥ a Brāhmaṇa. —dhanaḥ a king. —dhara a. 1. holding

or supporting the earth; Ku. 3. 13. —2. dwelling on the earth (—raḥ) 1. a

mountain. —2. an epithet of Śiva. —3. of Kṛṣṇa. —4. the number ‘seven’. —

īśvaraḥ, -rājaḥ an epithet of the mountain Himālaya. -jaḥ a tree. —dhraḥ a

mountain. —nāgaḥ a kind of earth-worm. —tetṛ m. a sovereign, ruler, king.

—paḥ a sovereign, ruler, king. —patiḥ 1. a king. —2. an epithet of Śiva. —3.

of Indra. —padaḥ a tree. —padī a particular kind of jasmine. —paridhiḥ the

circumference of the earth. —pavitraṁ cow dung. —pālaḥ 1. a king,

sovereign. —2. an epithet of king Bhoja. —pālanaṁ sovereignty, dominion.

—putraḥ, —mutaḥ 1. the planet Mars. —2. N. of the demon Naraka, q. v.

—putrī, —sutā ‘daughter of the earth’, an epithet of Sītā. —prakaṁpaḥ an

earthquake. —pradānaṁ a gift of land. —phalaḥ a kind of rat. —viṁbaḥ —

baṁ the terrestrial globe. —bhartṛ m. a king, sovereign. —bhāgaḥ a

region, place, spot. —bhuj m. a king. —bhṛt m. 1. a mountain; dātā me

bhūbhṛtāṁ nāthaḥ pramāṇīkriyatāmiti Ku. 6. 1; R. 17. 78. —2. a king,

sovereign; niṣprabhaśca ripurāsa bhūbhṛtāṁ R. 11. 81. —3. an epithet of

Viṣṇu. —maṁḍalaṁ 1. the earth, (terrestrial globe). —2. the

circumforence of the earth. —ruṁḍī a kind of sun-flower —ruh m., —ruhaḥ

a tree. —latā a worm. —lokaḥ (bhūrlokaḥ) 1. the terrestrial globe.

(2) the country on the southern part of the equator. —valayaṁ

=bhūmaṁḍalaṁ q. v. —vallabhaḥ a king, sovereign. —vṛttaṁ the equator.

—śakraḥ ‘Indra on earth’, a king, sovereign. —śayaḥ 1. an epithet of Viṣṇu.

—2. any animal lying on the earth. —śayyā lying on the ground. —śuddhiḥ

f. purification of the ground by sweeping &c. —śravas m. an anthill. —

suraḥ a Brāhmaṇa. —spṛś m. 1. a man. —2. mankind. —3. a Vaiśya. —

svargaḥ an epithet of the mountain Meru. —svāmin m. a landlord.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

bhūḥ strī, (bhavatyasminniti . bhū + adhikaraṇe kvip .) pṛthivī . ityamaraḥ

. 2 . 1 . 2 .. (yathā, manuḥ . 7 . 6 .

na cainaṁ bhuvi śaknoti kaścidapyabhivīkṣitum .. yathā ca

vaidyakaratnamālāyāmasyāḥ paryāyaḥ .

bhūrbhūmiḥ pṛthivī pṛthvī medinī vasudhāvaniḥ .

kṣitirurvī mahī kṣauṇī kṣmā dharā kurvasundharā ..) sthānamātram .

iti medinī . bhe, 1 .. (yathā, bhāgavate . 6 . 4 . 31 .

yacchaktayo vadatāṁ vādināṁ vai vivādasaṁvādabhuvo bhavanti ..

yajñāgniḥ . iti jaṭādharaḥ ..

भूधर — bhūdhara Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899bhūdhara «bhū-dhara» mfn. «earth-bearing», dwelling in the earth

bhūdhara «bhū-dhara» m. «earth-supporting», N. of Kṛiṣṇa

bhūdhara «bhū-dhara» m. of Baṭuka-bhairava

bhūdhara «bhū-dhara» m. a mountain (ifc. f. «ā») &c.

bhūdhara «bhū-dhara» m. «mountain» and «king»

bhūdhara «bhū-dhara» m. a term for the number seven

bhūdhara «bhū-dhara» m. N. of Siva or of the serpent-demon śeṣa

bhūdhara «bhū-dhara» m. a kind of chemical or medical apparatus

bhūdhara «bhū-dhara» m. N. of sev. men

bhūdhara «bhū-dhara» m. «guhāntara-tas» ind. from within the caves of

the mountains

bhūdhara «bhū-dhara» m. «-ja» m. «mountain-born», a tree ()

bhūdhara «bhū-dhara» m. «-tā» f. the state or act of supporting the earth

bhūdhara «bhū-dhara» m. «-yantra» n. a partic. apparatus for boiling

bhūdhara «bhū-dhara» m. «-rāja» m. = «-dhareśvara»

bhūdhara «bhū-dhara» m. «-dharātmaka» or «-dharādhīśa» m. N. of

Baṭukabhairava

bhūdhara «bhū-dhara» m. «-dharāraṇya» n. a mountain-forest

bhūdhara «bhū-dhara» m. «-dharevara» m. «mountain-lord», N. of Hima-

vat

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

bhūdhara (2. bhū + dhara) 1) adj. «die Erde tragend»: nāgasahasra so v.

a. «in der Erde wohnend» R. 3, 20, 32. «die Erde erhaltend»: Śiva MBH.

13, 746. Kṛṣṇa BHĀG. P. 3, 13, 39. bhūdhara, bhūdharādhīśa und

bhūdharātmaka unter den Beiww. Vaṭukabhairava’s VIŚVASĀRAT. im

ŚKDR. (u. bhūpati). — 2) m. a) «Berg» H. 1027. INDR. 5, 10. HARIV.

4407. Spr. 1114. 2177. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 12, 2. RĀJA-TAR. 1, 95. MĀRK. P.

57, 11. 83, 34. bhūḥ sabhūdharā BHĀG. P. 3, 13, 39. KATHĀS. 19, 69.

asta- 37, 177. ratna- PAÑCAR. 4, 6, 10. Bez. «der Zahl sieben» (vgl.

kulaparvata) SŪRYAS. 1, 30. 32. 2, 24. — b) Bez. «eines best. Apparates»

(yantrabheda) ŚABDAC. im ŚKDR. — c) N. pr. eines Commentators des

Sūryasiddhānta Verz. d. Oxf. H. 327,a, No. 773. Ind. St.2,251. COLEBR.

Misc. Ess. II,323. fgg.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

bhūdhara bhū-dhara, m.

1. A mountain, Pañc. 157, 25.

2. A kind of chemical or medicinal apparatus; a sand-bath in which a

covered crucible is placed, and the fire is lighted above as well as below

it.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

bhūdhara a. bearing or supporting the earth; m. mountain.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

bhūdhara pu° bhuvaṁ dharati dhṛ—ac . parvate amaraḥ .

भूभृत् — bhūbhṛt Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899bhūbhṛt «bhū-bhṛt» m. «earth-supporter», a mountain &c.

m. a term for the number «seven»

m. N. of Viṣṇu

m. a king, prince &c.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

bhūbhṛt (2. bhū + bhṛt) m. 1) «Träger der Erde, Berg» AK. 3, 4, 1, 18. 14,

63. H. 18. 1027, Sch. H. an. 2, 184. MED. t. 140 (wo nādrau zu lesen ist).

KUMĀRAS. 6, 1. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 9, 38. 43, 35. Spr. 1853. 5000. PRAB. 5,

1. «Berg» und «Fürst» zugleich Inschr. in Journ. of the Am. Or. S. 7, 25, Śl.

8. Vgl. kula-. — 2) «Erhalter der Erde, — der Welt», Beiw. Viṣṇu’s Verz. d.

Oxf. H.4,a, No. 28. — 3) «Erhalter der Erde, — des Landes, König, Fürst»

AK. 3, 4, 14, 63. H. 689. H. an. MED. RAGH. 11, 81. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 17,

5. 30, 28. 43, 35. Spr. 1844, v. l. 2075, v. l. 4718. 4495. VID. 331.

KATHĀS. 4, 81. 15, 7. 27, 78. 35, 47. 38, 159. 39, 237. 43, 233. 44, 112.

MĀRK. P. 28, 34. 127, 22. RĀJA-TAR. 1, 108. 3, 179. 8, 3495. Inschr. in

Journ. of the Am. Or. S. 7, 9, Śl. 32. 25, Śl. 8 (zugleich «Berg).»

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

bhūbhṛt bhū-bhṛ + t, m.

1. A king. Rājat, 5, 46.

2. A mountain, Pañc. i. d. 372.

— Comp. kula-, m. a principal mountain, Ragh. 17, 78.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

bhūbhṛt m. earth-holder i.e. mountain, king, or Viṣṇu.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

bhūbhṛt puṁ, (bhuvaṁ bibhartīti . bhṛ + kvip . hrasvasya pitikṛti tuk . 6 . 1

. 71 . iti tugāgamaśca .) rājā . (yathā, raghau . 11 . 81 .

tena bhūminihitaikakoṭi tat kārmukañca balinādhiropitam .

niṣprabhaśca ripurāsa bhūbhṛtām dhūmaśeṣa iva dhūmaketanaḥ ..)

parvataḥ . iti medinī . te, 140 .. (yathā, kumārasambhave . 6 . 1 .

atha viśvātmane gaurī sandideśa mithaḥ sakhīm .

dātā me bhūbhṛtāṁ nāthaḥ pramāṇīkriyatāmiti ..)

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

bhūbhṛt pu° bhuvaṁ bibharti dhārayati, pālayati vā bhṛ kvip . 1 parvate 2

bhūpāle ca medi° .

भूमिः — bhūmiḥ Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

bhūmiḥ f. [bhavaṁtyasmin bhūtāni, bhū-mi kicca vā ṅīp]

(1) The earth (opp. svarga, gagana or pātāla); dyaurbhūmirāpo

hṛdayaṁ yamaśca Pt. 1. 182; R. 2. 74.

(2) Soil, ground; utkhātinī bhūmiḥ S. 1; Ku. 1. 24.

(3) A territory, district, country, land; vidarbhabhūmiḥ

(4) A place, spot, ground, plot of ground; pramadavanabhūmayaḥ S.

6; adhityakābhūmiḥ N. 22. 41; R. 1. 52, 3. 61; Ku. 3. 58.

(5) A site, situation.

(6) Land, landed property.

(7) A story, the floor of a house; as in saptabhūmikaḥ prāsādaḥ.

(8) Attitude, posture.

(9) A character or part (in a play); cf. bhūmikā. (10) Subject, object,

receptacle; viśvāsabhūmi, snehabhūmi &c.

(11) Degree, extent, limit; Ki. 10. 58.

(12) The tongue.

(13) The number ‘one’.

— Comp.

—aṁtaraḥ a king of an adjacent district.

—āmalakī, -ālī N. of a plant.

—icchā a desire for lying on the ground.

—iṁdraḥ, —īśvaraḥ a king, sovereign.

—kadaṁbaḥ a kind of Kadamba.

—kaṁpaḥ an earthquake.

—gartaḥ, guhā a hole in the ground.

—gṛhaṁ a cellar, an underground chamber.

—calaḥ, -calanaṁ an earthquake.

—ja a. earth-born, born or produced from the earth. (

—jñaḥ) 1. the planet Mars. —2. an epithet of the demon Naraka. —

3. a man. —4. the plant bhūniṁba. (—jā) an epithet of Sīta.

—jīvin a. living on (the produce of) land; an agriculturist. (—m.) a

Vaiśya.

—talaṁ the surface of the earth.

—dānaṁ a grant of land.

—devaḥ a Brahmaṇa,

—dharaḥ 1. a mountain. —2. a king. —3. the number ‘seven’.

—nāthaḥ, —paḥ patiḥ, pālaḥ, —bhuj m. 1. a king, sovereign; R. 1.

47. —2. a Kshatriya.

—pakṣaḥ a swift or fleet horse.

—piśācaṁ the wine-palm.

—putraḥ the planet Mars.

—puraṁdaraḥ 1. a king. —2. N. of Dilīpa.

—bhāgaḥ a spot or portion of ground

—bhṛt m. 1. a mountain. —2. a king.

—maṁḍā a kind of jasmine.

—rakṣakaḥ 1. a guardian of a country. —2. a swift or fleet horse.

—ruhaḥ a tree.

—lābhaḥ death (lit. returning to the dust of the earth).

—lepanaṁ cow-dung.

—vardhanaḥ, -naṁ a dead body, corpse.

—śaya a. sleeping on the ground. (

—yaḥ) 1. a wild pigeon. —2. a child, boy. —3. any animal living in

the earth.

—śayanaṁ, —śayyā sleeping on the ground.

—satraṁ an offering of land.

—saṁbhavaḥ -sutaḥ 1. the planet Mars. —2. an epithet of the

demon Naraka. (

—vā, —tā) an epithet of Sītā.

—saṁniveśaḥ the general appearance of a country.

—snuḥ an earth-worm.

—spṛś a. 1. blind. —2. lame, cripple. (—m.) 1. a man. —2. mankind.

—3. a Vaiśya. —4. a thief.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

bhūmiḥ strī, (bhavanti bhūtānyasyāmiti . bhū + bhuvaḥ kit . uṇā° 4 . 45 .

iti miḥ . sa ca kit .) pṛthivī . sthānamātram . iti medinī . me, 22 ..

(yathāsyā paryāyaḥ .

bhūrbhūmiḥ pṛthivī pṛthvī medinī vasudhāvaniḥ .

kṣitirurvī mahī kṣauṇī kṣmā dharā kurvasundharā .. iti

vaidyakaratnamālāyām ..) jihvā . iti saṁkṣiptasāroṇādivṛttiḥ ..

yogināmavasthāviśeṣaḥ . yathā —

niruddhe cetasi purā savikalpasamādhinā .

nirvikalpasamādhistu bhavedatra tribhūmikaḥ ..

vyuttiṣṭhate svatastvādye dvitīye parabodhitaḥ .

ante vyuttiṣṭhate naiva sadā bhavati tanmayaḥ ..

evaṁ prāgbhūmisiddhāvapyuttarottarabhūmaye .

vidheyā bhagavadbhaktistāṁ vinā sā na sidhyati .. iti

gītāgūḍhārthadīpikāyāṁ madhusūdanasarasvatī .. bhūmeḥ paryāyādayaḥ

pṛthivīśabde draṣṭavyāḥ . asyā guṇāḥ .

bhūmeḥ sthairyaṁ gurutvañca kāṭhinyaṁ prasavārthatā .

gandho gurutvaṁ śaktiśca saṁghātaḥ sthāpanā dhṛtiḥ .. iti

mahābhārate mokṣadharmaḥ .. asyārthaḥ . sthairyamacāñcalyam 1 .

gurutvaṁ patanapratiyogī guṇaḥ 2 . kāṭhinyam 3 . prasavārthatā

dhānyādyutpattistadarthatā 4 . gandhaḥ 5 . gurutvaṁ piṇḍapuṣṭiḥ 6 .

śaktiḥ gandhagrahaṇasāmarthyam 7 . saṁghātaḥ śliṣṭāvayavatvam 8 .

sthāpanā manuṣyādyāśrayam 9 . dhṛtiḥ pāñcabhautike manasi yo

dhṛtyaṁśaḥ . iti taṭṭīkā .. * .. bhūmidānamāhātmyam yathā —

sarveṣāmeva dānānāṁ bhūmidānamanuttamam .

yo dadāti mahīṁ rājan ! viprāyākiñcanāyavai ..

aṅguṣṭhamātramathavā sa bhavet pṛthivīpatiḥ .

na bhūmidānasadṛśaṁ pavitramiha vidyate ..

bhūmiṁ yaḥ pratigṛhṇāti bhūmiṁ yaśca prayacchati .

ubhau tau puṇyamāpannau niyataṁ khargagāminau ..

yatkiñcidbhūmidānantu sarvadānottamottamam .

mahīpate ! naraḥ ko’pi bhūmido bhūmimāpnuyāt ..

bhūmidānasamaṁ dānaṁ nāstyatra pṛthivītale .

tasmādalpamalañcaiva bhuktimuktisukhapradam ..

yathā tathā prakāreṇa bhūmidātā tu bhūmipaḥ .

sukhī syāt sarvakāleṣu cānte svargamavāpnuyāt ..

bṛhadalpataraṁ vāpi bhūmidānaṁ mahattamam .

yaḥ kaścidbrāhmaṇe dattvā bhavatīha mahīpatiḥ ..

sarvathā sarvadā deyā dharitrī brāhmaṇasya tu .

prāṇāntenaiva na kvāpi haraṇīyā janairapi ..

kṛtvā khātādikaṁ karma viprabhūmiṁ naro balāt .

karoti yadi rājendra ! tat sarvaṁ niṣphalaṁ bhavet ..

brāhmaṇāddānagrahaṇaṁ vinānujñāñca pārthiva ! .

tathā tatparitoṣañca tattanmūlyādikaṁ vinā ..

viprabhūmau bhūsuro’pi daivaṁ paitraṁ tathādhvaram .

harisadma tathārāmaprāsādamaṇḍapaṁ gṛham ..

khātādikhananaṁ setubandhanaṁ bhavanaṁ gavām .

sadhānyaphalamūlādiśākādikṣetrameva ca ..

pañcāmravapanaṁ puṣpodyānaṁ vṛkṣādiropaṇam .

savaṭāśvatthatulasīdhātrīvilvādiropaṇam ..

nityaṁ naimittikaṁ kāmyaṁ snānasandhyādikaṁ tathā .

pañcayajñaṁ tatheṣṭārcādikametattu cāparam ..

śrīkṛṣṇasevanaṁ bhaktabhaktiṣoḍaśapūrbakam .

kā kathā vetareṣāntu na kuryāt pāramārthikaḥ ..

yaḥ karmaphalakāmepsurna karotyatra karma ca .

kurute mattatāmohādajñānādvā bhramāditaḥ .

nṛpate ! kurvatāmetat sarvaṁ syānniṣphalaṁ dhruvam ..

yadbhū mirathavā tasya saṁpūrṇaṁ phalameva ca .

ato loke hi dharmātmā jñānī ca sarvadharmavit ..

vivekī dharmaśāstrajñaḥ purāṇāgamavedavit .

vedāntajño muniḥ sādhuḥ kārṣṇādirvā mahīpate ! .

na kuryādbhū miharaṇaṁ brāhmaṇīharakalmaṣam .. iti

pādmottarakhaṇḍe 49 adhyāyaḥ .. * .. api ca . bṛhaspatiḥ .

ṣaṣṭiṁ varṣasahasrāṇi svarge tiṣṭhati bhūmidaḥ .

ucchettā cānumantā ca tāvanti narake vaset ..

tathā .

bhūmiṁ dattvā tu yaḥ patraṁ kuryāccandrārkakālikam .

anācchedyamanāhāryaṁ dānalekhyantu tadbiduḥ ..

mahābhārate .

api pāpakṛto rājñaḥ pratigṛhṇanti sādhavaḥ .

pṛthivīṁ nānyadicchanti pāvanīṁ jananīṁ yathā ..

nāmāsyāḥ priyadatteti guhyaṁ devyāḥ sanātanam .

dāne vāpyathavādāne nāmāsyāḥ paramaṁ priyam .. dānādānakāle yat

priyadattā nāmāsyāḥ paramaṁ priyamityuktaṁ tena

priyadattāmityuccārya dātavyā pratigrahītavyā ca . bhūmeḥ pūjāyāṁ

dānavākye ca priyadatteti viśeṣaṇam . bhūmirviṣṇudevatākā .

ṣaṣṭivarṣasahasrāvacchinnasvargavāsaḥ phalam . pratigrahe tadbhūmeḥ

pradakṣiṇamātram . bhūmerasannidhāne tāmuddiśya pradakṣiṇam . iti

śuddhitattvam .. * .. ārdrādyapādage ravau bhūmī rajoyuktā bhavati

tatkāle pāṭhādiniṣedho yathā jyotiṣe .

rajoyuk kṣmāmbu vācī ca raudrādyapādage ravau .

tasyāṁ pāṭho bījavāpo nāhibhīrdugdhapānataḥ ..

rajoyuk kṣmā ṛtumatī pṛthvī . jyotiṣe .

yasmin vāre sahasrāṁśuryatkāle mithunaṁ vrajet .

ambu vācī bhavennityaṁ punastatkālavārayoḥ .. matsyasūkte .

dharaṇyāmṛtumatyāñca bhūmikampe tathaiva ca .

antarāgamane caiva vidyāṁ naiva paṭhedbudhaḥ .. iti tithyāditattvam

.. * ..

na svādhyāyaṁ vaṣaṭkāraṁ na devapitṛpūjanam .

halānāṁ yojanañcaiva bījānāṁ vapanaṁ tathā .

dinatrayaṁ na kurvīta yāvat pṛthvī rajasvalā ..

yatino vratinaścaiva vidhavā ca dbijastathā .

ambuvācīdinenaiva pākaṁ kṛtvā na bhakṣayet ..

svapākaṁ parapākaṁ vā ambuvācīdine tathā .

bhakṣaṇaṁ naiva kurvīta cāṇḍālānnasamaṁ smṛtam .. iti

rājamārtaṇḍaḥ .. aśuddhāṁ bhūmimāha devalaḥ . sā amedhyā malinā

duṣṭā etattritayānyatamā bhavati . atrāmedhyā yathā —

prasūte garbhiṇī yatra mriyate yatra mānuṣaḥ .

cāṇḍālairuṣitaṁ yatra yatra vinyasyate śavaḥ ..

viṇmūtropahataṁ yattu kuṇapo yatra dṛśyate .

evaṁ kaśmalabhūyiṣṭhā bhūramedhyeti lakṣyate .. kuṇapaḥ śavaḥ .

duṣṭā yathā —

kṛmikīṭapadakṣepairdūṣitā yatra medinī .

drapsāpakarṣarṇeḥ kṣiptairvāntaiśca duṣṭatāṁ vrajet .. drapsā

ghanībhūtaśleṣmā . malinā yathā —

nakhadantatanūjatvaktuṣapāṁśurajomalaiḥ . bhasmapaṅkatṛṇairvāpi

pracchannā malinā bhavet .. tāsāñca śuddhimāha .

dahanaṁ khananaṁ bhūmerupalepanavāpane .

paryanyavarṣaṇañcaiva śaucaṁ pañcavidhaṁ smṛtam .. vāpanaṁ

mṛdantareṇa pūraṇam . atrāmedhyāyāścatuṣkaṁ pañcakaṁ vā . duṣṭāyāḥ

dvikaṁ trikaṁ vā . malināyāḥ dahanādīnāmekadhā śodhanamāha devalaḥ

.

pañcadhā vā caturdhā vā bhūramedhyā viśudhyati .

dvidhā duṣṭā tridhā vāpi śudhyate malinaikadhā ..

anyapañcaprakāramāha manuḥ .

sammārjanenāñjanena sekenollekhanena ca .

gavāñca parivāsena bhūmiḥ śuddhyati pañcadhā .. sammārjanaṁ

tṛṇādyapanayanam . añjanaṁ gomayenopalepanam . seko jalena

prakṣālanam . ullikhanaṁ takṣaṇam . parivāso gavopasthāpanam atra

sekaparivāsayornirlepasthāpanaviṣayatvam

anyeṣāmamedhyaliptaviṣayatvam . brahmapurāṇe .

grāmāddaṇḍaśataṁ tyaktvā nagarācca caturguṇam .

bhūmeḥ sarvatra śuddhiḥ syādyatra loko na vidyate .. daṇḍaṁ

caturhastaḥ . nagaraṁ mahāgrāmaḥ . iti

gopālapañcānanakṛtaśuddhinirṇayaḥ .. * .. bhūmau

varṇalesvanādiniṣedho yathā —

na bhūbhau vilikhedvarṇaṁ mantraṁ na pustake likhet .

na muktvā pustakaṁ sthāpyaṁ na muktamāharettu tat ..

bhūkampe grahaṇe caiva akṣaraṁ vātha pustakam .

bhūmau tiṣṭhati deveśi ! janmajanmasu mūrkhatā .

tadā bhavati deveśi ! tasmāttat parivarjayet .. iti yoginītantre

tṛtīyabhāge 7 paṭalaḥ ..

भूमिधर — bhūmidhara Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899bhūmidhara «bhūmi-dhara» m. «earth-supporter», a mountain

m. a symbolical expression for the number seven

m. a king, prince

m. N. of a poet

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

bhūmidhara (bhū- + dhara) m. 1) «Träger der Erde, Berg» AK. 3, 4, 14,

63. R. 5, 54, 19. KUMĀRAS. 7, 54. Bez. «der Zahl sieben» (vgl.

kulaparvata) SŪRYAS. 2, 17. — 2) «Erhalter der Erde, — des Landes, König,

Fürst» MĀLAV. 9, 2.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

bhūmidhara m. earth-holder, mountain or king.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

bhūmidhara pu° bhūmiṁ dharati dhṛ—ac . 1 kulaparvate upacārāt 2

parvatamātre .

महीध्र — mahīdhra Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899mahīdhra «mahī-dhra» m. (for «-dhara») a mountain &c.

m. N. of the number «seven» (cf. «parvata»)

m. N. of Viṣṇu

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

mahīdhra (ma- + dhra) gaṇa mūlavibhujādi zu P. 3, 2, 5, Vārtt. 2. 1)

«Berg» AK. 2, 3, 1. H. 1027, Sch. MBH. 5, 7216. RAGH. 3, 60. 13, 7. Spr.

2982. BHĀG. P. 2, 7, 32. Bez. «der Zahl sieben» (vgl. kulaparvata)

SŪRYAS. 2, 25. — 2) «Träger» so v. a. «Erhalter der Erde», Bein. Viṣṇu’s

BHĀG. P. 3, 13, 27. — Vgl. mahīdhara.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

mahīdhra m. = prec. m.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

mahīdhra pu° mahīṁ dhārayati dhṛ—ka . parvate amaraḥ . ac .

mahīdharo’pyatra .

मुनि — muni Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899muni m. (accord. to «man») impulse, eagerness (?)

muni m. (prob.) any one who is moved by inward impulse, an inspired or

ecstatic person, enthusiast

m. a saint, sage, seer, ascetic, monk, devotee, hermit (esp. one who

has taken the vow of silence) &c. &c. (with «hṛdayeṣu sthitaḥ», the

internal monitor or conscience

m. a Brāhman of the highest (eighth) order, Hcst.

m. N. of a son of Kuru

m. of a son of Dyuti-mat

m. of Vyāsa

m. of Bharata

m. of Agastya

m. of a Buddha or Arhat

m. of Pāṇini &c. (cf. «-traya»)

m. of other nien

m. of various authors

m. of various plants (Agati Grandiflora, Buchanania Latifolia, Butea

Frondosa, Terminalia Catappa, the mango-tree and Attemisia Indica)

muni pl. «the celestial Munis», N. of the seven stars of Ursa Major (and

there fore a symbolical N. for the number «seven»)

muni n. N. of a Varshs (called after a royal Muni)

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

muni (von man nach UṆĀDIS. 4, 122) m. f. (muni und munī gaṇa bahvādi

zu P. 4, 1, 45) AK. 3, 6, 5, 38. TRIK. 3, 5, 16. 1) m. a) etwa «Drang.

Andrang»: śubhro vaḥ śuṣmaḥ krudhmī manāṁsi dhunirmuniriva

śardhasya dhṛṣṇoḥ «frisch ist der Hauch, zornig der Muth, wie ein

tosender Drang der verwegenen Schaar» (der Winde) ṚV. 7, 56, 8. Es ist

nicht möglich hier mit SĀY. die Bed. «Asket» festzuhalten. — b) «(der von

innerem Drang Getriebene) ein Begeisterter, Verzückter.» Zu dieser

Auffassung passt, was von Verzük- kung und Vergöttlichung der Muni ṚV.

10, 136, 2. 4. deveṣito muniḥ 5 gesagt und was vom Muni Aitaśa AIT. BR.

6, 33 erzählt wird, den sein Sohn für verrückt hält. indro munīnāṁ sakhā

ṚV. 8, 17, 14. munerdevasya mūlena sarvā vidhyāmi tā aham AV. 7, 74,

1. ŚAT. BR. 9, 5, 2, 15. Später bezeichnet das Wort jeden

«ausgezeichneten Weisen, Seher, Asketen» überh., insbes. «den, welcher

das Gelübde des Schweigens angenommen hat» (vgl. mauna), AK. 2, 7,

41. TRIK. 3, 3, 252. H. 76. an. 2, 279. MED. n. 15. HALĀY. 2, 189. 257.

VIŚVA beim Schol. zu VĀSAVAD. 19. Accent eines auf muni ausgehenden

comp. gaṇa ghoṣādi zu P. 6, 2, 85. — ŚAT. BR. 14, 6, 4, 1. 7, 2, 25. TAITT.

ĀR. 2, 20. pāntu tvā munayo brāhmyā divyā rājarṣayastathā SUŚR. 1, 16,

20. evamācārato dṛṣṭvā dharmasya munayo gatim. sarvasya tapaso

mūlamācāraṁ jagṛhuḥ param.. M. 1, 110. R. 1, 4, 14. RAGH. 3, 49.

nagānyakṣānsurānpitṝn. gandharvāpsarasaścaiva munīnsiddhāṁśca

VARĀH. BṚH. S. 48, 25. devamunisiddhacāraṇaiḥ 74, 19.

munimatānyavalokya 68, 117. Spr. 3019. VET. in LA. (II) 20, 20.

marīcyādīnmunīn M. 1, 58. bhṛgu 59. munīnāmapyahaṁ vyāsaḥ (sagt

Kṛṣṇa) BHAG. 10, 37. vasiṣṭhādyairmunibhiḥ WEBER, RĀMAT. UP. 327. R.

1, 52, 3. RAGH. 1, 94. 2, 55. dakṣādyā munisattamāḥ VP. bei MUIR, ST.

1, 27. vālmīkermunisiṁhasya R. Einl. Narasakha VIKR. 3. Sārasvata

VARĀH. BṚH. S. 54, 99. Bharata gemeint SĀH. D. 137, 6. Vyāsa KIR. 5,

49. puṇyaḥ śabdo muniriti muhuḥ kevalaṁ rājapūrvaḥ (muni = ṛṣi, da das

Wort rājarṣi gemeint ist) ŚĀK. 47. eko ‘hamasmītyātmānaṁ yattvaṁ

kalyāṇa manyase. nityaṁ sthito hṛdyeṣa puṇyāpekṣitā muniḥ (d. i. «das

Gewissen)» Spr. 563. dvimuni, trimuni vyākaraṇasya P. 2, 1, 19, Sch. —

traya d. i. Pāṇini, Kātyāyana und Patañjali Verz. d. Oxf. H. 182,b,14. —

duḥkheṣvanudvignamanāḥ sukheṣu vigataspṛhaḥ. vītarāgabhayakrodhaḥ

sthitadhīrmunirucyate.. BHAG. 2, 56. muniveṣa R. 1, 4, 2. M. 6, 25. 41.

43. pravrajito muniḥ 8, 407. munivaramapi nāryaḥ kāmayante vasante

ṚT. 6, 30. -śreṣṭhāḥ BRAHMA-P. in LA. (II) 48, 12. Spr. 954. 2218. fg.

āśrameṣu munīnām MBH. 1, 7665. ŚĀK. 62, 23. AK. 2, 2, 6. HALĀY. 2,

143. BHAR. beim Schol. zu ŚĀK. 52, 3. PAÑCAT. 34, 13. vārddhake

munivṛttīnām RAGH. 1, 8. -kanyā 51. -kumāra ŚĀK. 104, 5. Vgl. mahā-. —

c) «die» Muni «am Himmel, die sieben» Muni oder schlechtweg «die» Muni

(vgl. ṛṣi 1, «c») Bez. «der sieben Sterne des grossen Bären»:

antarikṣagatāṁścaiva munīndevāṁśca M. 7, 29. MBH. 13, 1370. VARĀH.

BṚH. S. 11, 34. 13, 1. āsanmaghāsu munayaḥ śāsati pṛthvīṁ yudhiṣṭhire

nṛpatau 3 (= RĀJA-TAR. 1, 56). 47, 12. BHĀG. P. 4, 12, 34. Daher Bez.

«der Zahl sieben» ŚRUT. 43. fg. SŪRYAS. 2, 18. fg. 12, 88. VARĀH.

LAGHUJ. 1, 10 in Ind. St. 2, 279. — d) Bein. eines Buddha oder Arhant AK.

1, 1, 1, 9. TRIK. H. an. MED. LALIT. ed. Calc. 3, 20. WASSILJEW 11. Vgl.

śākya-. — e) N. pr. eines Sohnes des Kuru MBH. 1, 3740. des Djutimant

MĀRK. P. 53, 23. = munisuvrata H. 49. Statt jitvāmuṁ munibhūbhujam

RĀJA-TAR. 3, 332 ist wohl mit der ed. Calc. jitvā mummuni- zu lesen. —

f) N. verschiedener Pflanzen: «Agati grandiflora Desv.» (agasti, agastya;

von WILSON hier als N. pr. des Ṛṣi aufgefasst) H. an. MED. VIŚVA a. a.

O. «Buchanania latifolia Roxb.» und «Butea frondosa Roxb.» H. an. (pālāśa

in der Bed. von palāśa) und VIŚVA (kiṁśuka). «Terminalia Catappa» und

«der Mangobaum» VIŚVA. «Artemisia indica» RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. —

VĀSAVAD. 19, 2. — 2) f. a) «eine Frau als» Muni: muniriyaṁ brāhmaṇī

oder munī UJJVAL. zu UṆĀDIS. 4, 122. — b) N. pr. einer Tochter Daksha’s

und Gattin Kaśyapa’s, die als Mutter einer Klasse von Gandharva und

Apsaras (vgl. mauneya) erscheint, MBH. 1, 2520. HARIV. 171. 234. 11521

(die neuere Ausg. muniḥ st. khasā). 11553. 12447. VP. 122. BHĀG. P. 6,

6, 25. 27. MĀRK. P. 104, 6. KĀD. in ZdmG.7, 584. — Vgl. mauna, maunika.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

muni 1 I The mother of the Yakṣas. It is stated that Kaśyapaprajāpati

begot of his wife Muni, the Yakṣas. (Chapter 19, Agni Purāṇa). The

Gandharvas also were born of Muni. She gave birth to sixteen Gandharvas

of which the first was named Bhīmasena. (Śloka 42, Chapter 65, Ādi

Parva).

muni 2 II Son of a Vasu named Ahar (i.e. Ahaḥ) (Śloka 23, Chapter 66,

Ādi Parva).

muni 3 III Son of Kuru of the Pūru line of kings. Kuru begot of his wife

Vāhinī five sons named Aśvavān, Abhiṣyanta, Caitraratha, Janamejaya

and Muni. (Śloka 50, Chapter 94, Ādi Parva).

muni 4 IV One of the seven sons of a King named Dyutimān.

(Mārkaṇḍeya Purāṇa 5. 24).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

muni muni, i. e. man + i (u for a, by the influence of the preceding labial),

I. m.

1. A holy sage, endowed with divine inspiration, Vikr. d. 3.

2. An ascetic, Pañc. 34, 13.

3. The saint Agastya, Vyāsa, Kir. 5, 49.

4. The name of two plants.

II. f. ni/ī, A female saint.

— Comp. mahā-,

I. m. 1. a great Muni, Chr. 15, 29; Rām. 3, 49, 50 (epithet of Agastya.) 2.

the saint Agastya. 3. epithet of Paraśurāma, Chr. 19, 12, and of Vyāsa. 4.

time.

II. n. Coriander.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

muni m. impulse or a man driven by (inward) impulse; an inspired saint

or seer; ascetic, devotee, hermit, monk, esp. one who has taken the vow

of silence; pl. the seven stars of the Great Bear (cf. ṛṣi).

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

muni muni, m. inspired or ecstatic man (V.); sage, seer, ascetic, hermit,

sp. one who has taken the vow of silence (C., rarely in Br.); seer in the

heart = conscience: pl. the seven sages (= the seven Ṛṣis) or stars of

the Great Bear; sg. N.; N. of the mango tree, Artemisia indica, Butea

frondosa, Buchanania latifolia, and Agati grandiflora.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

muni pu° mana—in pṛṣo° utvam . duḥkheṣvanudvignamanāḥ suṇeṣu

vigataspṛhaḥ . vītarāgabhayakrodhaḥ sthiradhīrmunirucyate

gītoktalakṣaṇe sthiracitte vītarāgādau jane . te ca

manvatriviṣṇuhārotādaya . 2 saptasaṁkhyāyāñca . 3 vaṅgasenatarau 4

jine medi° . 5 piyālavṛkṣe 6 parāśaravṛkṣe hemaca° 7 damanakaddhakṣe

rājani° . mananānmunirucyate ityukte 8 mananayute tri° .

मुनिः — muniḥ Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

muniḥ [man-in ucca Uṇ. 4. 122]

(1) A sage, a holy man, saint, devotee, an ascetic; munīnāmapyahaṁ

vyāsaḥ Bg. 10. 37; duḥkheṣvanudvignamanāḥ sukheṣu vigataspṛhaḥ .

vītarāgabhayakrodhaḥ sthiradhīrmunirucyate .. 2. 56; puṇyaḥ śabdo

muniriti muhuḥ kevalaṁ rājapūrvaḥ S. 2. 14; R. 1. 8, 3. 49.

(2) N. of the sage Agastya.

(3) Of Vyāsa.

(4) Of Buddha.

(5) of Paṇini.

(6) N. of several plants (piyālu, parāśara and damanaka).

(7) The internal conscience (according to Kull. on Ms. 8. 91 ‘the

supreme spirit’).

(8) The mango-tree.

(9) The the number ‘seven’. —pl. The seven sages.

— Comp.

—annaṁ (pl.) the food of ascetics.

—iṁdraḥ 1. ‘the lord of the sages’, a great sage. —2. an epithet of

Śākyamuni. —3. of Bharata. —4. of Śiva.

—īśaḥ, —īśvaraḥ 1. a great sage. —2. an epithet of Viṣṇu. —3. of

Buddha.

—trayaṁ ‘the triad of sages’, i. e. Pāṇini, Kātyāyana, and Patanjali

(who are considered to be inspired saints); munitrayaṁ namaskṛtya, or

trimuni vyākaraṇaṁ Sk.

—dārakaḥ, —kumāraḥ a young sage.

—drumaḥ the Śyonāka tree.

—pittalaṁ copper.

—puṁgavaḥ a great or eminent sage.

—putrakaḥ 1. a wagtail.

(2) the damanuka tree. —bheṣajaṁ 1. the fruit of the yellow

myrobalan. —2. fasting. —vṛtti a. leading an ascetic life; śaiśave

munivṛttīnāṁ R. 1. 8. —vrataṁ an ascetic vow; Ku. 5. 48.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

muniḥ puṁ, manute jānāti yaḥ . (iti man + maneruśca . uṇā° 4 . 122 . iti

in + ata ucca .) maunavratī . ityanye . iti bharataḥ .. tatparyāyaḥ .

vācaṁyamaḥ 2 . ityamaraḥ . 2 . 7 . 42 . maunī 3 vratī 4 ṛṣiḥ 5 śāpāstraḥ 6

satyavāk 7 . iti jaṭādharaḥ .. (yathā, naiṣadhe . 1 . 133 .

phalena mūlena ca vāribhūruhāṁ munerivetthaṁ mama yasya

vṛttayaḥ ..) lasya lakṣaṇaṁ yathā —

duḥkheṣvanudbignamanāḥ sukheṣu vigataspṛhaḥ .

vītarāgabhayakrodhaḥ sthitadhīrmunirucyate .. iti śrībhagavadgītā .. *

.. tasya dharmo yathā — brahmovāca .

munibhiścaritā dharmā uktā vyāsa ! mayā tava .

yairviṣṇustuṣyate devaḥ sukhādiparibhāvikaḥ ..

tarpaṇena ca homena sandhyayā bandanena ca .

prāpyate bhagavān viṣṇurvrarmakāmārthamīkṣadaḥ ..

dharmo viṣṇurbrato viṣṇuḥ pūjā viṣṇustu tarpaṇam .

homaḥ sandhyā tathā dhyānaṁ dhāraṇā sakalaṁ hariḥ .. iti gāruḍe

226 adhyāyaḥ .. * .. tasyāśrame varṇanīyāni yathā . atithipūjā 1

hariṇaviśvāsaḥ 2 hiṁsrajantuśāntatā 3 yajñadhūmaḥ 4 munisutaḥ 5

drumasekaḥ 6 valkalaḥ 7 vṛkṣaśca 8 . iti kavikalpalatā .. * ..

muniviśeṣāṇāṁ brahmaṇo’ṅgaviśeṣādutpattiryathā —

pulastyo dakṣakarṇācca pulahī vāmakarṇataḥ .

dakṣanetrāttathātriśca vāmanetrāt kratuḥ svayam ..

araṇirnāsikārandhrāt aṅgirāśca mukhādruciḥ .

bhṛguśca vāmapārśvācca dakṣo dakṣiṇapārśvataḥ ..

chāyāyāḥ kardamo jāto nābheḥ pañcaśikhastathā .

vakṣasaścaiva voḍhuśca kaṇṭhadeśācca nāradaḥ ..

marīciḥ skandhadeśācca āpastambastathā galāt .

vaśiṣṭho rasanādeśāt pracetā adharoṣṭhataḥ ..

haṁsaśca vāmakukṣeśca dakṣakukṣeryatiḥ svayam .

sṛṣṭiṁ vidhātuñca vidhiścakārājñāṁ sutānapi .. iti brahmavaivarte

brahmakhaṇḍe 8 adhyāyaḥ .. * .. gayāsuraśarīre yajñārthaṁ brahmaṇo

mānasāt sṛṣṭā munayo yathā —

brahmā sambhṛtasambhāro mānasānṛtvijo’sṛjat .

agniśarmāṇamamṛtaṁ śaunakaṁ jājaliṁ mṛdum ..

kumukhiṁ vedakauṇḍinyaṁ hārītaṁ kaśyapaṁ kṛpam .

gargaṁ kauśikavāśiṣṭhau muniṁ bhārgavamavyayam ..

vṛddhaṁ pārāśaraṁ kaṇvaṁ māṇḍavyaṁ śrutikevalam .

śvetaṁ sutālaṁ damanaṁ suhotraṁ kakṣameva ca ..

naugākṣiñca mahābāhuṁ jegīṁṣavyaṁ tathaiva ca .

dadhipañcamukhaṁ vipra ! ṛṣabhaṁ karkameva ca ..

kāmāyanaṁ gobhilañca munimugraṁ mahāvratam .

jaṭāmālinamavyagraṁ cāṭuhāsañca dāruṇam ..

ātreyañcāpyaṅgirasamaupamanyuṁ mahāvratam ..

gokarṇañca guhāvāsaṁ śikhaṇḍinamumāvratam ..

supālakaṁ gautamañca tathā vedaśiro vratam .

etānanyāṁśca viprendrān brahmā lokapitāmahaḥ .

parikalpyākarodyāgaṁ gayāsuraśarīrake .. iti vāyupurāṇe

gayāmāhātmyam .. * .. muniviśeṣanāmnāṁ vyutpattiryathā —

katikalpāntare’tīte sraṣṭuḥ sṛṣṭividhau punaḥ .

marīcimiśrairmunibhiḥ sārdhaṁ kaṇṭhādbabhūva saḥ ..

vidhernaradanāmnaśca kaṇṭhadeśādbabhūva saḥ .

nāradaśceti vikhyāto munīndrastena hetunā ..

yaḥ puttraścetaso dhāturbabhūva munipuṅgavaḥ .

tena pracetā iti tannāma cakre pitāmahaḥ ..

babhūva dhāturyaḥ puttraḥ sahasā dakṣapārśvataḥ .

sarvakarmaṇi dakṣaśca tena dakṣaḥ prakīrtitaḥ ..

vedeṣu kardamaḥ śabdaśchāyāyāṁ vartate sphuṭaḥ .

babhūva kardamādbālaḥ kardamastena kīrtitaḥ ..

tejobhede marīciśca vedeṣu vartate sphuṭam .

jātaḥ sadyo’titejasvī marīcistena kīrtitaḥ ..

kratusaṁghaśca bālena kṛto janmāntare’dhunā .

brahmaputtro’pi tannāmnā kraturityabhidhīyate ..

pradhānāṅgaṁ mukhaṁ dhātustato jātaśca bālakaḥ .

irastejasvivacano’ṅgirāstena prakīrtitaḥ ..

atitejasvini bhṛgurvartate nāmni śaunaka ! .

jātaḥ sadyo’titejasvī bhṛgustena prakīrtitaḥ ..

vaśībhūtaśca śiṣṭaśca jātaḥ sadyo hi bālakaḥ .

atipriyaśca dhātuśca vaśiṣṭhastena kīrtitaḥ ..

bālo’pyaruṇavarṇaṁśca jātaḥ sadyo hi tejasā .

prajvalan pūrbatapasā cāruṇastena kīrtitaḥ ..

haṁsa ātmā vaśo yasya yogena yogino dhruvam .

bālaḥ paramayogīndrastena haṁsaḥ prakīrtitaḥ ..

santataṁ yasya yatnañca tapaḥsu bālakasya ca .

prakīrtito yatistena saṁyataḥ sarvakarmasu ..

pulastapaḥsu vedeṣu vartate ha sphuṭe’pi ca .

sphuṭaṁ tapaḥsvarūpaśca pulahastena kīrtitaḥ ..

pulastapaḥsamūhaśca yasyāsti pūrbajanmanām .

tapaḥsaṁghaḥ samūhaśca pulastyastena bālakaḥ ..

triguṇāyāṁ prakṛtyāṁ trirviṣṇāvaśca pravartate .

tayorbhaktiḥ samā yasya tena bālo’trirucyate ..

jaṭāścāgniśikhārūpāḥ pañca santi ca mastake .

tapastejobhavā yasya sa ca pañcaśikhaḥ smṛtaḥ ..

apāntaratame deśe tapastepe’nyajanmani .

apāntaratamā nāma śiśostena prakīrtitam ..

svayantapaḥ samāpnoti vāhayet prāpayet parān .

ūḍhuḥ samarthastapasi voḍhustena prakīrtitaḥ ..

tapasastejasā bālo dīptimān sūnṛto mune ! .

tapaḥsu rocate cittaṁ rucistena prakīrtitaḥ .. iti brahmavaivatte

brahmakhaṇḍe 22 adhyāyaḥ .. vaṅgasenataruḥ . jinaḥ . iti medinī . ne, 15

.. priyālavṛkṣaḥ . palāśavṛkṣaḥ . iti hemacandraḥ . 1 . 76 ..

damanakavṛkṣaḥ . iti rājanirghaṇṭaḥ .. (strī, dakṣakanyā . sā ca

kaśyapapatnīnāmanyatamā . yathā, mahābhārate . 1 . 65 . 11-12 .

marīceḥ kaśyapaḥ puttraḥ kaśyapāttu imāḥ prajāḥ .

prajajñire mahābhāgā dakṣakanyāstrayodaśa ..

aditirditirdanuḥ kālā danāyuḥ siṁhikā tathā .

kroghā prādhā ca viśvā ca vinatā kapilā muniḥ .. aṣṭavasvantargatasya

āpanāmakasya vasoḥ puttre, puṁ . yathā, harivaṁśe bhaviṣyaparvaṇi . 3

. 40 .

āpasya puttro vaitaṇḍyaḥ śramaḥ śrānto munistathā .

krauñcadvīpasya deśaviśeṣaḥ . yathā, matsyapurāṇe . 121 . 83-85 .

krauñcasya kuśalo deśo vāmanasya mano’nugaḥ .

mano’nugāt pare coṣṇastṛtīyo’pi sa ucyate ..

uṣṇāt pare pāvanakaḥ pāvanādandhakārakaḥ .

andhakārakadeśāttu munideśastathāparaḥ .. (dyutimataḥ

puttrāṇāmanyatamaḥ . yathā, mārkaṇḍeye . 53 . 22 .

tathā dyutimataḥ saptaputtrāstāṁśca nibodha me .

muniśca dundubhiścaiva saptamaḥ parikīrtitaḥ .. kuruputtrabhedaḥ .

yathā, mahābhārate . 1 . 94 . 49 ..

avikṣitamabhiṣvastaṁ tathā caitrarathaṁ munim ..)

लीकः — līkaḥ Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

līkaḥ [lokyate’sau lok-ghañ]

(1) The world, a divison of the universe; (roughly speaking there are

three lokas svarga, pṛthvī and pātāla, but according to fuller classification

the lokas are fourteen, seven higher regions rising from the earth one

above the other, i. e. bhūrloka, bhuvarloka, svarloka, maharloka,

janarloka, taparloka, and satyaloka or brahmaloka; and seven lower

regions, descending from the earth one below the other; i. e. atala,

vitala, sutala, rasātala, talātala, mahātala and pātāla).

(2) The earth, terrestrial world (bhūloka); ihaloke in this world (opp.

paratra).

(3) The human race, mankind, men, as in lokātiga, lokottara &c. q. v.

(4) The people or subjects (opp. the king); svasukhanirabhilāṣaḥ

khidyase lokahetoḥ S. 5. 7; R. 4. 8.

(5) A collection, group, class, company; ākṛṣṭalīlān naralokapālān R.

6. 1; or śaśāma tena kṣitipālalokaḥ 7. 3.

(6) A region, tract, district, province.

(7) Common life, ordinary practice (of the world) lokavattu

līlākaivalyaṁ Br. Sū1t. II. 1. 33; yathā loke kasyacidāptaiṣaṇasya rājñaḥ

&c. S. B. (and diverse other places of the same work).

(8) Common or worldly usage (opp. Vedic usage or idiom); vedoktā

vaidikāḥ śabdāḥ siddhā lokācca laukikāḥ, priyataddhitā dākṣiṇātyā yathā

loke vede ceti prayoktavye yathā laukikavaidikeṣviti prayuṁjate Mbh.;

(and in diverse other places); ato’smi loke vede ca prathitaḥ

puruṣottamaḥ Bg. 15. 18.

(9) Sight, looking. (10) The number ‘seven’, or ‘fourteen’.

(11) Ved. Open space; space, room. (In compounds loka is often

translated by ‘universally’, ‘generally’, ‘popularly’; as lokavijñāta; so —

vidviṣṭa).

— Comp.

—akṣaḥ space, sky.

—atiga a. extraordinary, supernatural.

—atiśaya a. superior to the world, extraordinary.

—adhika a. extraordinary, uncommon; sarvaṁ

paṁḍitarājarājitilakenākāri lokādhikaṁ Bv. 4. 44; Ki. 2. 47.

—adhipaḥ 1. a king. —2. a god or deity.

—adhipatiḥ a lord of the world.

—anurāgaḥ ‘love of mankind’, universal love, general benevolenee,

philanthropy.

—aṁtaraṁ ‘another world’, the next world, future life; R. 1. 69; 6.

45; lokāṁtaraṁ gam. prāp &c. ‘to die.’

—apavādaḥ public scandal, popular censure; lokāpavādo

balavānmato me R. 14. 40.

—abhibhāvin a. 1. overcoming the world. —2. pervading the whole

world (as light).

—abhyudayaḥ public weal or welfare.

—ayanaḥ N. of Nārāyaṇa.

—alokaḥ N. of a mythical mountain that encircles the earth and is

situated beyond the sea of fresh water which surrounds the last of the

seven continents; beyond lokāloka there is complete darkness, and to this

side of it there is light; it thus divides the visible world from the regions of

darkness; prakāśaścāprakāśaśca lokāloka ivācalaḥ R. 1. 68;

lokālokavyāhataṁ gharmarāśeḥ śālīnaṁ vā dhāma nālaṁ prasartuṁ Śi.

16. 83; Mv. 5. 10, 45; (for further explanation see Dr. Bhāṇḍārkar’s note

on l. 79 of Māl. 10th Act.). (

—kau) the visible and the invisible world.

—ācāraḥ common practice, popular or general custom, ways of the

world; api śāstreṣu kuśalā lokācāravivarjitāḥ Pt. 5. 43.

—ātman m. the soul of the universe.

—ādiḥ 1. the beginning of the world. —2. the creator of the world.

—āyata a. atheistical, materialistic. (

—taḥ) a materialist, an atheist, a follower of Charvāka. (

—taṁ) materialism, atheism; (for some account see the first

chapter of the Sarvadarśanasamgraha).

—āyatikaḥ an atheist, a materialist.

—īśaḥ 1. a king (lord of the world). —2. Brahman. —3. quick-silver.

—uktiḥ f. 1. a proverb, popular saying; Pt. 1. 371. —2. common talk,

public opinion.

—uttara a. extraordinary, uncommon, unusual; lokottarā ca kṛtiḥ

Bv. 1. 69, 70; U. 2. 7. (

—raḥ) a king.

—ekabaṁdhuḥ an epithet of Śākyamuni.

—eṣaṇā desire for heaven.

—kaṁṭakaḥ 1. a troublesome or wicked man, the curse of mankind.

—2. an epithet of Rāvaṇa; see kaṁṭaka. —kathā a popular legend.

—kartṛ, —kṛt m. the creator of the world.

—kalpa a. 1. resembling the world. —2. regarded by the world. (

—lpaḥ) a period or age of the world.

—kāṁta a. liked by the people, popular; V. 5. 21.

—kāraṇakāraṇaḥ an epithet of Śiva.

—gatiḥ f. actions of men.

—gāthā a song handed down among people.

—cakṣus n. the sun.

—cāritraṁ the ways of the world.

—jananī an epithet of Lakṣmī.

—jit m. 1. an epithet of Buddha. —2. any conqueror of the world.

—3. a sage.

—jña a. knowing the world.

—jyeṣṭhaḥ an epithet of Buddha.

—tattvaṁ knowledge of mankind.

—taṁtraṁ course of the world.

—tuṣāraḥ camphor.

—trayaṁ, —trayī the three worlds taken collectively;

utkhātalokatrayaṁkaṭake’pi R. 14. 73.

—dvāraṁ the gate of heaven.

—dhānuḥ a particular division of the world.

—dhātṛ m. an epithet of Śiva.

—nāthaḥ 1. Brahman. —2. Viṣṇu. —3. Śiva. —4. a king, sovereign.

—5. a Buddha.

—netṛ m. an epithet of Śiva.

—paḥ, —pālaḥ 1. a regent or guardian of a quarter of the world;

lalitābhinayaṁ tamadya bhartā marutāṁ draṣṭumanāḥ salokapālaḥ V. 2.

18; R. 2. 75, 12. 89, 17. 78; (the lokapālas are eight; see aṣṭadikpāla).

—2. a king, sovereign.

—paktiḥ f. esteem of mankind, general respectability.

—patiḥ 1. an epithet of Brahman. —2. of Viṣṇu. —3. a king,

sovereign.

—pathaḥ, —paddhatiḥ f. the general or usual way, the universally

accepted way.

—pitāmahaḥ an epithet of Brahman.

—prakāśanaḥ the sun.

—pravādaḥ general rumour, current report, popular talk.

—prasiddha a. well-known, universally known.

—baṁdhuḥ, —bāṁdhavaḥ 1. the sun. —2. Śiva.

—bāhya, —vāhya a. 1. excluded from society, excommunicated. —2.

differing from the world, eccentric, singular. (

—hyaḥ) an outcast.

—bhāvana, —bhāvin a. promoting the welfare of the world.

—maryādā an established or current custom.

—mātṛ f. an epithet of Lakṣmī.

—mārgaḥ an established cuslom.

—yātrā 1. worldly affairs, the course of worldly life, business of the

world; evaṁ kileyaṁ lokayātrā Mv. 7; yāvadayaṁ

saṁsārastāvatprasiddhaiveyaṁ lokayātrā Ve. 3. —2. a popular usage or

custom. —3. worldly existence, career in life; Māl. 4, 6. —4. support of life,

maintenance.

—rakṣaḥ a king, sovereign.

—raṁjanaṁ pleasing the world, popularity.

—ravaḥ popular talk or report.

—lekhaḥ a public document.

—locanaṁ the sun.

—vacanaṁ a popular rumour or report.

—vādaḥ public rumour; common talk, popular report; māṁ

lokavādaśravaṇādahāsīḥ R. 14. 61.

—vārtā popular report, public rumour.

—vidviṣṭa a. disliked by men, generally or universally disliked.

—vidhiḥ 1. a mode of proceeding prevalent in the world. —2. the

creator of the world.

—viśrutaṁ a. farfamed, universally known, famous, renowned.

—viśruti f. 1. world-wide fame. —2. unfounded rumour, mere

report.

—vṛttaṁ 1. the way of the world, a custom prevalent in the world.

—2. an idle talk or gossip.

—vṛttāṁtaḥ, —vyavahāraḥ 1. the course or ways of the world,

general custom; S. 5. —2. course of events.

—vyayahāra a. commonly used, universally current.

—vrataṁ general practice or way of the world.

—śrutiḥ f. 1. a popular report. —2. world-wide fame.

—saṁsṛti f. fate, destiny.

—saṁkaraḥ general confusion in the world.

—saṁgrahaḥ 1. the whole universe. —2. the welfare of the world.

—3. worldly experience. —4. propitiation of mankind.

—sākṣika a. attested by witnesses.

—sākṣin m. 1. an epithet of Brahman. —2. fire.

—siddha a. 1. current among the people, usual, customary. —2.

generally received or accepted.

—sthitiḥ f. 1. existence or conduct of the universe, worldly

existence; the stability or permanence of the world; Bh. 2. 22. —2. a

universal law.

—hāsya a. world-derided, the butt of general ridicule.

—hita a. beneficial to mankind or to the world. (

—taṁ) general welfare.

लोक — loka Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899loka m. (connected with «roka»; in the oldest texts «loka» is generally

preceded by «u», which accord. to the = the particle 3. «u»; but «u» may

be a prefixed vowel and «uloka», a collateral dialectic form of «loka»;

accord. to others «u-loka» is abridged from «uru-» or «ava-loka»), free or

open space, room, place, scope, free motion (acc. with «kṛ» or «dā» or

«anu-» «nī», «to make room grant freedom»; «loke» with gen. «instead of»)

m. intermediate space

m. a tract, region, district, country, province

m. the wide space or world (either «the universe» or, «any division of

it», esp. «the sky or heaven»; 3 Lokas are commonly enumerated, viz.

heaven, earth, and the atmosphere or lower regions; sometimes only the

first two; but a fuller classification gives 7 worlds, viz. Bhū-loka, the

earth; Bhuvar-loka, the space between the earth and sun inhabited by

Munis, Siddhas &c.; Svar-loka, Indra’s heaven above the sun or between

it and the polar star; Mahar-loka, a region above the polar star and

inhabited by Bhṛigo and other saints who survive the destruction of the 3

lower worlds; Janar-loka, inhabited by Brahmā’s son Sanat-kumāra &c.;

Tapar-loka, inhabited by deified Vairāgins; Satya-loka or Brahma-loka,

abode of Brahmā, translation to which exempts from rebirth; elsewhere

these 7 worlds are described as earth, sky, heaven, middle region, place

of re-births, mansion of the blest, and abode of truth; sometimes 14

worlds are mentioned, viz. the 7 above, and 7 lower regions called in the

order of their descent below the earth — A-tala, Vi-tala, Su-tala, tala,

tala, Mahā-tala, and Pātāla; cf. 102 n. 1 420, 1; 435, 1) &c. &c.

m. N. of the number «seven» (cf. above )

m. the earth or world of human beings &c. &c. («ayaṁ lokaḥ», «this

world»; «asau» or «paro lokaḥ», «that or the other world»; loke or «iha»

«loke», «ere on earth», opp. to «para-tra, para-loke» &c.; «kṛtsne» «loke»,

«on the whole earth»)

loka m. (also pl.) the inhabitants of the world, mankind, folk, people

(sometimes opp. to «king») &c.

loka m. (pl.) men (as opp. to «women»)

m. a company, community (of ten ifc. to form collectives) &c.

m. ordinary life, worldly affairs, common practice or usage &c. («loke»

either «in ordinary life», «in worldly matters»; or, «in common language, in

popular speech», as opp. to «vede, chandasi»)

m. the faculty of seeing, sight (only in «cakṣur-l-» q.v.)

loka m. «lokānāṁ sāmanī» du. and «lokānāṁ vratāni» pl. N. of Sāmans

‘lusus’, originally, «a clearing of a forest»; Lith. ‘laukas’, a field.]

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

loka m. TRIK. 3, 5, 3. am Ende eines adj. comp. f. ā RAGH. 15, 60. Spr.

4097. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 8, 30. In den ältesten Texten finden wir

regelmässig die Verbindung u loka, sogar am Anfange eines Pāda (ṚV. 3,

2, 9. 37, 11. 5, 4, 11. 9, 2, 8). Im ṚV. erscheint das einfache loka nur 8,

89, 12. 9, 113, 7. 9. 10, 14, 9. 85, 20. 90, 14. VS. 11, 22 wird

missverständlich u in su verändert, obgleich diese Sammlung vereinzelt

(12, 35. 18, 52. 58) auch u erhalten hat. Dieser Umstand führt auf die

Vermuthung, dass uloka die ältere Form des Wortes gewesen, loka also

durch Abfall des Anlauts entstanden sei. Vgl. Ind. St. 1, 351. MÜLLER,

Transl. I, LXXIV. uloka weist auf uroka, das auf ur, var (vgl. uru, vara,

variman) zurückgeführt werden kann. Wer es vorzieht uroka von ruc

abzuleiten, könnte u als Rest der Präposition ava (vgl. avakāśa)

betrachten. 1) «freier Raum, das Freie; Raum» überh., «Ort, Platz, Stelle»:

dehi lokam «mache Platz» ṚV. 8, 89, 12. sīda hotaḥ sva u loke 3, 29, 8.

10, 13, 2. u loko yaste adriva indreha tata ā gahi 3, 37, 11. 2, 9. surabhā

u loke 5, 1, 6. asmā etaṁ pitaro lokamakran 10, 14, 9. VS. 2, 30.

pitṛṣadana 5, 26. 6, 6. deva somaiṣa te lokaḥ 8, 26. lokaṁ pṛṇa cchidraṁ

pṛṇa 12, 54. 19, 54. 35, 1. 2. 6. prajāṁ ca lokaṁ cāpnoti so v. a. «freies

Gebiet, freie Bewegung» AV. 4, 11, 9. 6, 123, 2. 12, 2, 1. 14, 2, 13. 18, 2,

25. atrādadhuryajamānāya lokam 4, 7. madhumant 9, 1, 23. ye pṛthivyāṁ

puṇyā lokāḥ 15, 13, 1. TS. 5, 7, 5, 3. AIT. BR. 3, 18. 1, 24. PAÑCAV. BR.

17, 13, 1. ŚAT. BR. 6, 2, 2, 28. yāvantaṁ lokaṁ jayati «Strecke, Gebiet»

11, 8, 3, 5. 13, 2, 7, 13. 14, 6, 9, 11. fgg. (vgl. BṚH. ĀR. UP. 3, 9, 10.

fgg.). 9, 4, 3. ātmā sarveṣāṁ bhūtānāṁ lokaḥ 4, 2, 29. jagatīnāṁ loke

triṣṭubhaḥ «statt der» J. ṢAḌV. BR. 3, 7. «Zwischenraum» KAUŚ. 86. loko

‘yam «diese Stätte, dieses Land, das von uns bewohnte Land» AK. 2, 1, 6.

Besonders in der Verbindung lokaṁ kar oder uruṁ lokaṁ kar «Raum —,

Luft —, Freiheit schaffen»: uruṁ tṛtsubhyo akṛṇodu lokam ṚV. 7, 33, 5. 1,

93, 6. 2, 30, 6. 4, 17, 7. 5, 4, 11. yo vo vṛtābhyo akṛṇodu lokam 10, 30, 7.

104, 10. VS. 11, 22. 23, 43. AV. 6, 121, 4. 9, 2, 11. 11, 1, 31. ĀŚV. ŚR. 4,

13, 5. jyotiryadahne akṛṇodu lokam «machte Platz» ṚV. 9, 92, 5. ähnlich

uruṁ no lokamanu neṣi 6, 47, 8. AV. 18, 2, 20. — 2) «der grosse Raum,

die Welt; Weltraum, jede imaginäre Welt» AK. 3, 4, 4, 2. H. 1365. an. 2,

16. MED. k. 33. HALĀY. 1, 133. VS. 32, 11. fg. AV. 8, 9, 1. 15. 11, 5, 7. 8,

10. sūryaḥ sadyaḥ sarvāṁ lokānparyeti rakṣan 4, 38, 5. 10, 9, 10. 10, 33.

divyāḥ, pārthivāḥ 9, 5, 14. sūryavantaḥ 18. TBR. 3, 12, 8, 2. nāputrasya

loko ‘sti «für den Sohnlosen ist die Welt nicht da» AIT. BR. 7, 13. kaumāro

loko ajaniṣṭa putraḥ «Kinderwelt» AV. 12, 3, 47. «Welt» im

ausgezeichneten Sinne: «Himmel, Stelle im Himmel» ŚAT. BR. 2, 6, 1, 7.

10, 5, 4, 16. 11, 2, 7, 19. na kṛtaghnasya loko ‘sti WEBER, KṚṢṆAJ. 225.

lokebhyaḥ parikṛntati M. 4, 219. lokāñjayati 9, 137. «Welten» von

verschiedener Art und Zahl ŚAT. BR. 14, 6, 6, 1. 7, 1, 36. fgg. 9, 1, 18.

ŚĀÑKH. BR. 20, 1. KĀṬH. 26, 4. M. 4, 181. fgg. puṣkalāḥ 8, 81.

ātmaprabhāḥ MBH. 3, 2227. tejomayāḥ 5, 2454. M. 6, 39. kāmagamāḥ

MBH. 3, 12034. kāṁllokāṁstvaṁ gamiṣyasi R. 2, 74, 9. trayaḥ AV. 10, 6,

31. 12, 3, 20. AIT. BR. 1, 5. ŚAT. BR. 13, 1, 7, 3. 14, 4, 3, 24. M. 2, 230.

232. 11, 261. 12, 97. MBH. 1, 5910. 7642. 3, 10660. 13, 312. R. 1, 6, 2. 2,

96, 45. 6, 102, 23. Spr. 1512. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 6, 6. 26, 4. -trayī Spr.

1079. ubhau lokau «Erde und Himmel» TBR. 3, 1, 2, 5. MBH. 12, 366.

MĀRK. P. 22, 36. P. 1, 3, 54, Schol. -dvaya KĀM. NĪTIS. 7, 55. 10, 24.

RĀJA-TAR. 5, 184. sapta ime lokāḥ MUṆḌ. UP.2,1,8. MBH.3,175.

13,5288. 5292. RAGH. 10,22. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 49,b,11. 57,a,3 v. u. (daher

Bez. «der Zahl sieben» Ind. St. 8, 386. 395). ayam AV. 5, 30, 17. 8, 8, 8.

12, 5, 38. 19, 54, 5. VS. 19, 46. ŚAT. BR. 13, 5, 1, 2. 2, 11, 2. M. 10, 128.

loke ‘smin 7, 3. 8, 343. 9, 24. 12, 53. MBH. 3, 2637. 2904. 2982. R. 1, 1,

2. 92. Spr. 5188. imaṁ lokam, madhyamam, brahmalokam M. 2, 233.

ihaivāste tu sā loke 3, 141. 10, 158. 12, 102. loke so v. a. iha loke «hier

auf Erden» 1, 11. 84. 4, 157. 5, 50. MBH. 1, 6122. 3, 2776. 2980. Spr.

1539. 3626. 4374. 4759. 5346 (Gegens. paratra). DHŪRTAS. 96, 7. loke

kṛtsne «auf der ganzen Erde» MBH. 3, 2119. tato durgaṁ ca rāṣṭraṁ ca

lokaṁ ca sacarācaram. antarikṣagatāṁścaiva munīndevāṁśca pīḍayet..

«die ganze Erde» M. 7, 29. lokaṁ prajahāti «er verlässt die Erde» VARĀH.

BṚH. S. 69, 36. ime lokāḥ AIT. BR. 3, 15. asau «jene Welt» AV. 12, 5, 38.

57. VS. 17, 2. TS. 1, 5, 9, 4. AIT. BR. 5, 28. 8, 2. ŚAT. BR. 1, 2, 5, 17. 14,

9, 1, 2. M. 10, 128. para AV. 6, 117, 3. ŚAT. BR. 14, 6, 7, 2. M. 11, 26.

AK. 3, 4, 32 (28), 16. uttare himavatpārśve puṇye sarvaguṇānvite.

puṇyaḥ kṣemyaśca kāmyaśca sa paro loka ucyate.. MBH. 12, 7010.

parāṁllokān WEBER, RĀMAT. UP. 342. tṛtīya AV. 6, 117, 3. tṛtīye vā ito

loke pitaraḥ TBR. 1, 3, 10, 5. parama AV. 19, 54, 5. AIT. BR. 1, 21. 2, 24.

śuci AV. 4, 34, 2. jyotiṣmant 9, 5, 6. puṇya 16. 19, 54, 5. VS. 20, 25.

pitṛyāna AV. 5, 18, 13. 6, 117, 3. devayāna ebend. nāraka 12, 4, 36.

svarge loke KAṬHOP. 1, 12. ŚAT. BR. 14, 7, 2, 11. M. 3, 140. 8, 103.

somasūryastṛcarita WEBER, JYOT. 110. jīvānām AV. 2, 9, 1. amṛtasya 8,

1, 1. sukṛtām und sukṛtasya s. u. d. Ww. yamasya AV. 6, 118, 2. pitṝṇām

3, 29, 4. 12, 2, 9. 45. bhadrasya 6, 26, 1. krūrakṛtām TBR. 1, 4, 6, 5.

puṇyakṛtām (so ist zu lesen) MBH. 3, 12025. apsarasām, vaiśvadevasya,

apām M. 4, 183. brahmaghnaḥ, strībālaghātinaḥ, mitradruhaḥ,

kṛtaghnasya 8, 89. saptānāṁ marutāṁ lokānvasūnāṁ ca MBH. 13, 5315.

gaccha lokānmahendrasya R. 4, 21, 27. rājarṣi- 1, 57, 5. pitṛ- CHĀND. UP.

8, 2, 1. mātṛ- 2. bhrātṛ- 3. svasṛ- 4. sakhi- 5. gandhamālya- 6. annapāna-

7. gītavāditra- 8. strī- 9. bhartṛ- M. 5, 165. 9, 29. urvaśī- (so die ed.

Bomb.) BHĀG. P. 9, 14, 44. 47. niraya- R. GORR. 2, 15, 23. — 3) pl. und

sg. «die Leute, die Menschen, das Volk» (auch im Gegens. zum Fürsten)

AK. H. 501. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 2, 129. lokānāṁ hitakāmyayā M. 12, 117.

lokeṣu yaśaḥ prāpa MBH. 3, 2081. lokeṣvapratimo bhuvi 2086. 13,6804.

15,900. HARIV. 4005. R.1,2,39. R. GORR.2,108,29. Spr. 311. 560. 1276.

1936. 2071. 2621. 4582. KATHĀS. 12,177. fg. RĀJA-TAR.1,352. BHĀG.

P.3,14,11. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 156,a,23. 25. PAÑCAT. 246,2. VET. in LA.

(III)1,3. sarve MBH. 15, 871. R. 3, 54, 7. Spr. 3127. 4582. PAÑCAT. 256,

25. sarvalokeṣu R. 1, 59, 20. bahavaḥ Spr. 4583. sarve puranivāsino

rājasaṁnidhilokāśca PAÑCAT. 26, 20. lokāḥ strīṣu ratāḥ so v. a. «die

Männer» VET. in LA. (III) 30, 9. gṛhalokāḥ HIT. 88, 18. sg. ŚAT. BR. 11, 5,

7, 1. NIR. 7, 4. priyā bhavanti lokasya M. 8, 42. 353. 9, 324. 11, 84. R. 1,

1, 87. 3, 1. 9. SĀṁKHYAK. 58. ŚĀK. 77. 192. ad 25, 7. Spr. 1443.2316, v.

l. 2331. 2602. 2684. 3734. 4958. RAGH. 6, 30. KATHĀS. 10, 113. 21, 116.

29, 179. 34, 143. RĀJA-TAR. 5, 263. DAŚAK. 66, 3. BHĀG. P. 5, 24, 3.

PAÑCAT. 48, 25. sarvasya lokasya RAGH. 4, 8. Spr. 5207. ŚAṁK. zu BṚH.

ĀR. UP. S. 45. fg. sarvalokaḥ «Jedermann» MBH. 1, 8051. Spr. 3580.

VARĀH. BṚH. S. 4, 8. PAÑCAT. 228, 2. nagaralokaḥ KATHĀS. 18, 122.

tīkṣṇalokaḥ Tīkṣṇa’s «Leute» RĀJA-TAR. 8, 1743. lokato ‘pi hi te rakṣyaḥ

parivādaḥ R. 2, 36, 30. pṛṣṭācca lokato buddhvā KATHĀS. 43, 139.

sakalalokanandana VARĀH. BṚH. S. 8, 47. lokahetoḥ ŚĀK. 104.

kṛpaṇalokamata Spr. 1012. 2680. lokavadaśrāmyat ŚAṁK. zu BṚH. ĀR.

UP. S. 55. — 4) «Gemeinschaft, Gesellschaft»: satāṁ lokāt — bhraśyatu R.

2, 75, 34. nara- so v. a. «die Menschen» R. GORR. 2, 1, 42. RAGH. 6, 1.

rākṣasa- R. 3, 41, 3. rāja- RAGH. 5, 64. naradeva- 6, 8. kṣitipāla- 7, 3.

naravīra- Spr. 2476. paura- KATHĀS. 4, 35. 12, 185. nāga- 22, 203.

vaṇigloka 29, 107. jñātilokatas VARĀH. BṚH. S. 52, 8. PAÑCAT. ed. orn.

58, 13. VET. in LA. (III) 9, 18. kuṭumba- 21, 18. nṛtiryaksuralokabhāṣā H.

59. Im Bengalischen ist loka geradezu zum Pluralsuffix geworden. — 5)

«das gemeine Leben», oft im Gegens. zur «Wissenschaft», insbes. «der

heiligen», zum Veda. NIR. 1, 2. lokatas so v. a. «wie üblich» ŚĀÑKH.

GṚHY. 4, 19. M. 7, 43. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 86, 10. BṚH. 2, 3. loke

SARVADARŚANAS. 92, 14. -mataṁnibarhaṇa Verz. d. Oxf. H. 251,a,3.

loke vede ca prathitaḥ BHAG. 15, 18. viruddho lokavedayoḥ MBH. 1, 7258.

lokavedaviruddha 7245. 6246. lokavedavirodhaka 7257. -virodhāt NĪLAK.

164. eṣa dharmaḥ striyā nityo vede loke śrutaḥ smṛtaḥ Spr. 3004.

lokapūta neben vedapūta NṚS. TĀP. UP. in Ind. St. 9, 116. loke vede ca

kuśalaḥ so v. a. «in weltlichen Angelegenheiten» KĀM. NĪTIS. 6, 1.

lokavedapathānuga BHĀG. P. 3, 3, 19. lokaśāstrābhyām 7, 13, 45.

śāstreṣu lokeṣu ca yatprasiddham Verz. d. Oxf. H. 195,a,6. -vidyāviruddha

207,a,16. loke im Gegens. zu kāvyanāṭyayoḥ H. 326. loke «im gemeinen

Leben» so v. a. «in der Sprache des Volkes», im Gegens. zu vede,

chandasi Schol. zu P. 3, 1, 42. 4, 1, 30. 3, 22. 6, 1, 181. 3, 1, 118, Vārtt. —

Vgl. a- (alokān neben lokān BHĀG. P. 3, 5, 8 erklärt der Comm. durch

lokālokaparvatādbahirbhāgān; vgl. auch 5, 20, 36), aṅga-, antarikṣa-,

amara-, aharloka, indra-, uru-, cakṣurloka, jana-, jīva-, tapo-, tala-, tri-,

deva-, dyaurloka, nara-, nṛ-, pati-, para-, pāpa-, pitṛ-, puṇya-, pṛthivi-,

pṛthivī-, preta-, bradhna-, brahma-, bhū-, bhūmi-, bhūrloka, madhya-,

madhyama-, manuja-, manuṣya-, marulloka, martya-, mṛtyu-,

yathālokam, yama-, vi-, sa-, samāna-, svarloka, svarga-.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

loka

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

loka loka, i. e. loc, or ruc, + a (with l for r, cf. ruc), m.

1. Seeing, sight.

2. The world, the universe, Chr. 34, 8.

3. A world, a division of the universe, Vikr. 86, 8 (madhyama, The

middle world, i. e. the earth).

4. Man, mankind.

5. Men. people, sing. and pl., Daśak. in Chr. 183, 13; Pañc. i. d. 19;

256, 24; Bhartṛ. 2, 52.

— Comp. a-, m. ceasing of the world, Rām. 1, 37, 12. aṅga-, m. the name

of a country, ib. 4, 43, 8. amara-, m. the world of the immortals. indra-,

m. the world of Indra, Man. 4, 182. go-, m. Kṛṣṇa’s heaven. gṛha-, m. the

household servants, Hit. 88, 18 (read tvadgṛha°). jana-, m. the name of a

world supposed to be situated over the maharloka, Bhāg. P. 2, 5, 39.

jīva-, m. 1. the world of living beings, i. e. the earth, Pañc. 226, 6. 2.

mankind, people, Pañc. i. d. 9. tapoloka, i. e. tapas-, m. one of the

supposed seven worlds, Bhāg. P. 2, 5, 39. tala-, m. the lower regions, ib.

2, 6, 42. tri-,

I. (n), and f. kī, the three worlds, MBh. 13, 1505; Rām. 3, 52, 22; Bhāg. P.

1, 5, 7.

II. m. °ka, the inhabitants of the three worlds, ib. 3, 2, 13. nara-vīra-, m.

mankind, Hit. iv. d. 80. para-, m. heaven, paradise, Pañc. 207, 21. paura-,

m. pl. citizens, Pañc. 48, 25. brahmaloka, i. e. brahman-, m. the supposed

eternal residence of the spirits of the pious, Sund. 4, 25; MBh. 12, 3996,

in Chr. 94. lokāloka, i. e. loka-a-, m. a mountainous belt bounding the

world. vi-, adj. solitary.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

loka [1] m. open splace, free room, place, region, world or one of the

(imaginary 2, 3, or 7) worlds, esp. the earth; people, men or mankind

(sgl. or pl.); company, community, troop or band of (—°); worldy life,

ordinary practice or common usage (opp. to higher things, esp.

knowledge).

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

loka lok-a, m. [orig. probably uloka, which is almost invariably used in

RV., and perh. = (a) va-loka: ruc] (free) space, room, place (V.); tract,

region, country; world, division of the universe (the two worlds = heaven

and earth; the three —, = the same and the atmosphere or the lower

regions; seven worlds are commonly spoken of); heaven; earth; (sg. &

pl.) mankind, folks, people (sts. opp. king); men (pl.: opp. women);

community, company (often -° to form collectives); ordinary life, common

usage, worldly affairs (opp. Veda); sight (only -° in cakṣur —, seeing with

the eye): (uruṁ) lokaṁ kṛ, make room for, grant freedom to (d.; V.);

ayaṁ lokaḥ, this world;

asau or paro lokaḥ, that or the other world;

loke, in place of (g.; Br.); in ordinary life, in popular speech; in the

world, on earth;

iha loke, here on earth;

kṛtsne loke, in the whole world.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

loka ṛ ka dīptau . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. (curā°para°-aka°-seṭ .) ṛ, alulokat

. ka, lokayati . iti durgādāsaḥ ..

loka ṛ ṅa īkṣe . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. (bhvā°ātma°-saka°-seṭ .) ṛ, alulokat

. ṅa, lokate . vilokayantyo vapurāpurakṣṇāṁ prakāmavistāraphalaṁ

hariṇyaḥ . ityādau vilokanaṁ vilokaḥ paścāt taṁ karotīti ñau sādhyam . iti

durgādāsaḥ ..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

loka dīptau cu° ubha° saka° seṭ . lokayati te alūlukat ta .

loka darśane bhvā° ā° saka° seṭ . lokate alokiṣṭa luloke . ṛdit caṅi na

hrasvaḥ . alulokat ta .

loka pu° lokyate’sau loka—ghañ . 1 bhuvane bhuvanaśabde dṛśyam . 2

jane ca amaraḥ . bhāve ghañ . 3 darśane .

वाजिन् — vājin Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899vājin mfn. swift, spirited, impetuous, heroic, warlike &c. &c. (with

«ratha» m. a war-chariot; superl. «vājin-tama»)

mfn. strong, manly, procreative, potent

mfn. winged, (ifc.) having any thing for wings

mfn. feathered (as an arrow)

vājin m. a warrior, hero, man (often applied to gods, esp. to Agni, Indra,

the Maruts &c.)

vājin m. the steed of a war-chariot

vājin m. a horse, stallion &c.

vājin m. N. of the number «seven» (cf. «aśva»)

vājin m. a bridle

vājin m. a bird

vājin m. an arrow

vājin m. Adhatoda Vasika

vājin pl. «the Coursers», a class of divine beings (prob. the steeds of the

gods, but accord. to Agni, Vāyu and Sūrya) («vājināṁ sāma» N. of a

Sāman

mfn. the school of Vājasaneya (so called because the Sun in the shape

of a horse revealed to Yājṇavalkya partic. Yajus verses called «a-

yātayāmāni» q.v.)

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

vājin a. [vāja-astyarthe ini]

(1) Swift, quick.

(2) Strong. —m.

(1) A horse; na gardabhā vājidhuraṁ vahaṁti Mk. 4. 17; satyamatītya

harito harīṁśca vartaṁte vājinaḥ S. 1; R. 3. 43, 4. 25, 67; Śi. 18. 31.

(3) An arrow.

(3) A follower of the Vājasaneyin branch of the Yajurveda.

(5) N. of Indra, Bṛhaspati and other gods. —nī

(1) A mare.

(2) N. of Ushas (dawn).

(3) Food (Ved.).

— Comp.

—pṛṣṭhaḥ the globe-amaranth.

—bhakṣaḥ a chickpea.

—bhojanaḥ a kind of kidneybean.

—medhaḥ a horse-sacrifice.

—śālā a stable.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

vājin (von vāja) adj. subst. 1) «rasch, muthig», subst. «Ross des

Streitwagens» NAIGH. 1, 14. NIR. 3, 3. ṚV. 1, 135, 5. 162, 1. 12. 163, 5.

rathe tiṣṭhannayati vājinaḥ puraḥ 6, 75, 6. aśva 7, 7, 1. 41, 6. śakema

vājino yamam 2, 5, 1. 10, 1. taṁ no dāta vājinaṁ rathe 34, 7. 8, 43, 25.

śveta 5, 1, 4. atya 30, 14. aruṣa 5, 56, 7. nāvājinaṁ vājinā hāsayanti 3,

53, 23. uddharṣaya vājināṁ vājināni 10, 103, 10. des Indra 1, 176, 5.

ratha «der rasche Wagen, Kriegswagen» 7, 34, 1. 9, 22, 1. AV. 13, 2, 7.

die Sonne als «Ross» 1, 1. TAITT. UP. 1, 10 (nach ŚAṁK.; vgl. u.

vājinīvasu). rāsabha ṚV. 1, 34, 9. 53, 5. VS. 1, 29. 9. 8. 13, 48. ŚAT. BR.

10, 6, 4, 1. gāvo vājinīḥ AV. 1, 4, 4. VS. 1, 29. Später m. «Ross, Pferd»

überh. AK. 2, 8, 2, 12. 3, 4, 18, 110. 25, 176. H. 1233. an. 2, 286. HĀR.

52. HALĀY. 2, 281. 1, 151. ŚAUNAKA in Z. f. vgl. Spr. 1, 442. M. 8, 209.

Spr. 2771. 3746. MBH. 3, 1720. 2823. 15672. HARIV. 11253 (wo mit der

neueren Ausg. dṛśya vājinam zu lesen ist). R. 1, 54, 12. 2, 39, 13. 40, 22.

91, 8. 92, 31. RAGH. 3, 43. vājinīrājanā 4, 25. 67. ŚĀK. 8, v. l. 6, 5. 8, 14.

VARĀH. BṚH. S. 2, 22. 5, 41. 18, 5. 42, 7. 66, 1. KATHĀS. 18, 96. 26, 85.

72, 52. RĀJA-TAR. 5, 143. BRAHMA-P. in LA. (III) 52, 12. PAÑCAT. 218,

7. Verz. d. B. H. No. 590. vājikarman Verz. d. Oxf. H. 86,b,21. vājinī

«Stute» HALĀY. 2, 285. Wie alle Worte für «Pferd» Bez. «der Zahl sieben»

GOLĀDHY. 7, 29. — 2) «tapfer, kriegerisch»; subst. «Held, Krieger; Mann

im lobenden Sinne» NIR. 3, 3. ṚV. 2, 24, 10. 13. ā no vājyabhīṣāLetu

navyaḥ 7, 4, 8. 90, 2. aśvāyanto vājino gavyantaḥ 32, 23. 6, 16, 4. Agni

ṚV. 3, 2, 14. 6, 16, 48. VS. 29, 1. Indra ṚV. 8, 2, 38. 3, 2. AV. 5, 29, 10.

Marut 7, 36, 7. 8, 20, 16. Pūṣan 6, 55, 4. vipra 7, 56, 15. Bṛhas- -pati

LĀṬY. 5, 12, 13. Ṛbhu ṚV. 3, 60, 7. 4, 37, 4. yasyāgṛdhadvedane

vāyyākṣaḥ «der Würfel» mit dem «beutemachenden Krieger» verglichen

10, 34, 4. Ushas NAIGH. 1, 8. vājena vājini «reisig» ṚV. 3, 61, 1. Sarasvatī

6, 61, 6. ghṛtācī 3, 6, 1. superl. vājintama 4, 37, 5. 10, 115, 6. — 3)

«männlich, zeugungskräftig»: somāya vājine nirvapedyaḥ klaibyādbibhīyāt

TS. 2, 3, 3, 4. tasya te vājipītasya bhakṣayāmi ĀŚV. ŚR. 2, 16, 19. vājī

somaṁ pītvā bhavati TBR. 1, 3, 2, 4. puruṣa PAÑCAV. BR. 13, 9, 13.

śuṣma AV. 4, 4, 2. agne tokaṁ tanayaṁ vāji no (so SĀY. und Padap.-

Hdschr., MÜLLER und AUFRECHT lesen vājino) dāḥ «männlich» ṚV. 6, 13,

6. tasmātsa dviretā vājī AIT. BR. 4, 9. — 4) «mit Flügeln versehen»:

tārkṣyeṇa stotravājinā «der die» Stotra «zu Flügeln hat» BHĀG. P. 4, 7, 19.

m. «Vogel» AK. 2, 5, 33. 3, 4, 18, 110. H. an. HALĀY. 2, 83. «ein best.

Vogel»: vājipakṣin (prājipakṣin MED. k. 116) = pālaṅka H. an. 3, 63. — 5)

«mit Federn versehen» (ein Pfeil): su- HARIV. 15944. m. «Pfeil» AK. 3, 4,

18, 110. H. an. — 6) vājinas pl. «Renner», Bez. göttlicher Wesen NAIGH.

5, 6. NIR. 12, 43. nach DURGA zu d. St. «Zügel», wobei er auf NIR. 9, 6

sich zu beziehen scheint; nach TBR. 1, 6, 3, 9 Agni, Vāyu, Sūrya. Es sind

aber «die Rosse» oder überh. «Gespanne der Götter» zu verstehen (vgl.

MAHĪDH. zu VS. 9, 16). ṚV. 7, 38, 7. 8. 10, 66, 10. ĀŚV. ŚR. 2, 16, 13.

vājino yajati devāśvā vā vājinaḥ ŚĀÑKH. BR. 5, 2. Oefters auf die Ṛtu

bezogen ŚAT. BR. 2, 4, 4, 22. KĀTY. ŚR. 4, 4, 23. LĀṬY. 4, 12, 18. paśavo

vājinaḥ KĀṬH. 36, 4. vājināṁ sāma (der Vers SV. I,5,1,5,9) ĀŚV.

ŚR.9,9,8. Ind. St.3,234,a. — 7) vājinas pl. so v. a. vājasaneyinas «die

Schule des» Vājasaneya, so genannt, weil die Sonne als «Ross» dem

Yājñavalkya die ayātayāmasaṁjñāni yajūṁṣi offenbarte, VP. bei MUIR

ST.3,32 (VP. 281). Verz. d. Oxf. H. 55,a,30. fgg. — 8) m. «Adhadota

Vasika Nees.» ŚABDAR. (ŚABDAC. nach WILSON) im ŚKDR. — 9) vājinī f.

a) «Stute» s. u. 1). — b) = aśvagandhā «Physalis flexuosa Lin.» ŚKDR. —

Vgl. śveta-.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

vājin vājin, i. e. vāja + in,

I. adj. Swift, Chr. 290, 6 = Rigv. i. 64, 6.

II. m.

1. A sacrificer, Chr. 292, 3 = i. 86, 3.

2. A horse, Pañc. 218, 7; Rājat. 5, 143.

3. An arrow.

4. A bird.

III. f. nī, A mare.

— Comp. śveta-, m. 1. the moon. 2. Arjuna.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

vājin a. swift, courageous, strong, brave, manly m. hero, warrior; horse,

stallion. Pl. the horses of the gods, also the sect of Vājasaneya.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

vājin vāj-in, a. V.: spirited, swift (steed; w. ratha, m. = war-chariot);

brave, warlike; manly, procreative; C.; winged; having — as wings (-°);

feathered (arrow; also once swift: -i-tā, f. feathered condition); m. hero,

warrior (V.); steed of a war-chariot (V.); horse, stallion (C.;

-i-tā, f. condition of a horse): pl. coursers = steels or teams of the

gods (V.); the school of Vājasaneya (so called because the sun in the

shape of a horse revealed certain Yajus verses to Yājñavalkya).

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

vājin pu° vājaḥ vemaḥ pakṣo vā astyasya ini . 1 ghoṭake 2 vāṇe 3 vāsake

ca śabdara° . 4 vebhavati tri° sviyāṁ ṅīp . mā ma . 5 aśvagandhāyatha 6

prāṭhakyām strī rājani° . 7 devabhede pu° . vājinaśabde dṛśyam .

शैल — śaila Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śaila mf («ī») n. (fr. «śilā») made of stone, stony, rocky &c.

mf («ī») n. stone-like, rigid (with «āsana» n. a partic. manner of

sitting)

śaila m. (ifc. f. «ā») a rock, crag, hill, mountain (there are seven [or,

accord, to some, eight] mythical mountain ranges separating the

divisions of the earth, viz. «niṣadha, hema-kūṭa, nīla, śveta, śṛṅgin,

mālyavat, gandha-mādana» &c.

śaila m. N. of the number «seven»

śaila m. a dike

śaila mf («ī») n. («ā») f. N. of a nun

śaila mf («ī») n. («ī») f. see below

śaila n. (only benzoin or storax

śaila n. bitumen

śaila n. a sort of collyrium.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

śaila a. (lī f.) [śilāḥ saṁtyasya prajñā- aṇ] Rocky, craggy, stony. —laḥ

(1) A mountain, hill; śaile śaile na māṇikyaṁ mauktikaṁ na gaje gaje

Chāṇ. 55; śailau malayadardurau R. 4. 51.

(2) A dike, dam.

(3) A rock, big stone. —laṁ

(1) Borax, benzoin.

(2) Bitumen.

(3) A kind of collyrium.

— Comp.

—aṁśaḥ N. of a country.

—agraṁ the peak of a mountain.

—aṭaḥ 1. a mountaineer, a barbarian. —2. an attendant on an idol.

—3. a lion. —4. a crystal.

—adhipaḥ, —adhirājaḥ, —iṁdraḥ, —patiḥ, —rājaḥ epithets of the

Himālaya.

—ākhyaṁ 1. benzoin. —2. a fragrant resinous substance.

—iṁdrasthaḥ the birch tree.

—kaṭakaḥ the side or slope of a mountain.

—gaṁdhaṁ a kind of sandal.

—jaṁ 1. benzoin. —2. bitumen.

—janaḥ a mountaineer.

—jā -tanayā putrī, -sutā epithets of Parvatī; avāptaḥ prāgalbhyaṁ

pariṇatarucaḥ śailatanaye K. P. 10; Ku. 3. 68.

—dhanvan m. an epithet of Śiva.

—dharaḥ an epithet of Kṛṣṇa.

—niryāsaḥ benzoin.

—patraḥ the Bilva tree.

—bhittiḥ f. an instrument for cutting stones, a stone cutter’s chisel.

—raṁdhraṁ a cave, cavern.

—vījaṁ the markingnut plant.

—śibiraṁ the ocean.

—sāra a. as strong as a mountain, firm as a rock; Ki. 10. 14.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śaila (von śilā) 1) adj. (f. ī; im BHĀG. P. ā wohl fehlerhaft) «steinern»:

mahāstra MBH. 3, 12141. bhūdhara HARIV. 4407. pātra SUŚR. 1, 240, 13.

daśa varṣasahasrāṇi śailī sthāsyasi R. 1, 64, 12. 4, 44, 77. pratimā

VARĀH. BṚH. S. 60, 5. BHĀG. P. 11, 27, 12. āsana «steinähnlich», Bez.

«einer best. Art des Sitzens» Verz. d. Oxf. H. 11,a, N. 1. — 2) m. a) «Fels,

Felsgebirge, Berg, Gebirge» AK. 2, 3, 1. 3, 4, 3, 20. TRIK. 2, 3, 1. H. 1027.

an. 2, 514. MED. l. 54. HALĀY. 2, 10. 5, 20. M. 1, 24. 10, 50. MBH. 1,

1123. 6022. 3, 15250. R. 1, 1, 39. 34, 8. 2, 25, 7. 48, 10. 54, 38. 4, 36, 8.

44, 115. 6, 108, 19. MEGH. 12. ad 112. RAGH. 4, 51. 71. 12, 73. ŚĀK. 50.

167. Spr. 3021. 5080. (II) 541, v. l. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 4, 23. 11, 42. 12, 1.

70, 10. -pakṣabhaṅga 32, 6. sapakṣakāḥ KATHĀS. 25, 43. NAIṢ 22, 44.

RĀJA-TAR. 4, 381. PRAB. 43, 5. BHĀG. P. 3, 28, 22. -varga Verz. d. Oxf.

H. 183,a,13. 191,b,21. 192,b, No. 437. 193,a,25. śailānāṁ śikharāṇi R. 4,

8, 5. -śikhara VIKR. 10, 6. -śṛṅga MBH. 1, 1164. Spr. (II) 2094. 3466. —

kūṭa VARĀH. BṚH. S. 12, 6. śailāgra TRIK. 2, 3, 2. -mūla SUŚR. 1, 227, 8.

VARĀH. BṚH. S. 24, 16. -śilā PRAB. 67, 10. mahāśailaśilā Spr. 3188.

mahā- MBH. 3, 2318. R. 2, 71, 4. am Ende eines adj. comp. (f. ā) MBH. 3,

10258. 9, 442. R. GORR. 2, 45, 16. 4, 36, 9. 6, 3, 51. KĀM. NĪTIS. 19, 14.

praviralālpa- SUŚR. 1, 130, 14. — b) aus metrischen Rücksichten für śilā

«Stein»: śailodbhava «steinern» SUŚR. 2, 356, 5. — c) Bez. «der Zahl

sieben» (wegen der «sieben Hauptgebirge») GANIT. MADHJAM. 4. — 3) f.

ī «hardness, stoniness» WILSON nach ŚABDĀRTHAK. (unter śailya). — 4)

n. Bez. «verschiedener Erdharze», = śaileya und tārkṣyaśailaka H. an.

MED. = śilājatu RATNAM. 290. — VARĀH. BṚH. S. 77,11. Verz. d. Oxf. H.

321,a, No. 761. — Vgl. krīḍā-, caitya-, tārkṣya-, tuhina-, pañca-, pāda-,

pūrva-, badarī-, maṇi-, mantha-, mahā-, rāja-, śrī-. Ein etymologisch

verschiedenes śailī s. bes.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

śaila śaila, i. e. śilā + a,

I. adj.

1. Stony, Arj. 8, 10; rocky.

2. Mountainous, mountaineer.

II. m.

1. A mountain, Man. 1, 27; Vikr. 10, 6.

2. A dike, Pañc. i. d. 115.

III. n.

1. Bitumen.

2. Storax.

— Comp. krīḍā, m. a pleasure mountain, Megh. 61. tārkṣya-, n. a kind of

collyrium, Suśr. 2, 66, 9. tuhina-, m. the Himālaya, Kathās. 22, 255.

pañcaśaila, i. e. pañśhan-, m. the name of a mountain, Mārk. P. 55, 8.

badarī- (see vadarī), n. a part of the Himālaya range. mantha-, m. the

mount Mandara. mahā-, m. a great mountain, Bhartṛ. 2, 56.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

śaila f. ī stony, stone-like; m. (adj. —° f. ā) rock, mountain, abstr. -tā f., —

tva n.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

śaila śaila, a. (ī) made of stone; stony; m. rock; hill, mountain: -kanyā, f.

daughter of the mountain (Himālaya), Pārvatī;

-kū-ṭa, mountain-peak;

-guru, a. heavy as a mountain; chief of mountains, Himālaya;

-tanayā, f. daughter of the mountain, Pārvatī -tā, f. condition of a

mountain;

-duhitṛ, f. daughter of the mountain, Pārvatī;

-dhā-tu, m. mineral;

-patha, m. mountain path;

-pura, n. N. of a town;

-maya, a. (ī) made of stone;

-mṛga, m. wild goat;

-rāja, m. king of mountains, Himālaya;

-śikhara, m. mountain peak;

-śekhara, m. id.;

-śṛṅga, n. id.;

-sāra, a. hard as a rock;

-sutā, f. daughter of the mountain, Pārvatī: -kānta, m. husband of

Pārvatī, Śiva;

-setu, m. embankment of stone.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

śaila na° śilāyāṁ bhavaḥ aṇ . 1 śaileye gandhadravyabhede . 2

tārkṣyaśaile medi° . 3 śilājatuni ca rājani° . śilāḥ santyasya prajñā° aṇ . 4

parvate pu° amaraḥ .

साप्त — sāpta Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899sāpta or #sāpta n. (fr. «saptan», of which it is also the Vṛiddhi form in

comp.) the number seven, a heptade ; a team of seven horses (accord.

to others m. and a proper N. )

sāpta n. (fr. «sapti») a horse-race, running-match for horses or the prize

given for one

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

sāpta (von saptan) P. 5, 1, 61 (varge). adj. «siebenfältig», n.

«Siebenzahl»: ratnāni triḥ sāptāni ṚV. 1, 20, 7. sapta sāptāni TS. 5, 4, 7,

5. Schol. zu P. 5, 1, 61. ŚĀÑKH. BR. 14, 5. Hierher wohl auch (oxyt.):

asmāntribhiḥ sāptebhiravatam «dreimal siebenmal» VĀLAKH. 11, 5.

sāpta (von sapti) 1) oxyt. m. wohl N. pr. VĀLAKH. 7, 5. — 2) parox. n.

vielleicht «Wettrennen» oder «Rennpreis»: aśyāma tatsāptam ṚV. 2, 19, 7.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

sāpta n. the number seven.

साप्तदश्य — sāptadaśya Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899sāptadaśya «sāpta-daśya» n. (fr. «saptadaśan») the number seventeen

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

sāptadaśya (von saptadaśan) n. «Siebzehnzahl» ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 1, 4, 11. 16,

19. TBR. Comm. 1, 174, 14. AIT. BR. Comm. 1, 1.

स्वर — svara Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899svara «svaraṇa» &c. see p.1285.

svara m. (ifc. f. «ā») sound, noise &c. &c.

svara . ; voice &c.

svara . ; tone in recitation &c. (either high or low), accent (of which there

are three kinds, «udātta, anudātta» qq. vv., and «svarita», col.3), a note of

the musical scale (of which seven [rarely six or eight] are enumerated, 1.

«niṣāda»; 2. «ṛṣabha»; 3. «gāndhāra»; 4. «ṣaḍja»; 5. «madhyama»; 6.

«dhaivata»; 7. «paṇcama» [described as resembling respectively the notes

of an elephant, bull, goat, peacock, curlew or heron, horse, and Koil

svara m. (ifc. f. «ā») sound, noise &c. &c.

m. voice &c.

m. tone in recitation &c. (either high or low), accent (of which there

are three kinds, «udātta, anudātta» qq. vv., and «svarita», col.3), a note of

the musical scale (of which seven [rarely six or eight] are enumerated, 1.

«niṣāda»; 2. «ṛṣabha»; 3. «gāndhāra»; 4. «ṣaḍja»; 5. «madhyama»; 6.

«dhaivata»; 7. «paṇcama» [described as resembling respectively the notes

of an elephant, bull, goat, peacock, curlew or heron, horse, and Koil; and

designated by their initial letters or syllables thus, «ni; ṛ; ga; ṣa; ma; dha;

pa»], but the order is sometimes changed, «ṣadja» being placed first, and

«niṣāda» last) &c.

m. a symbolical expression for the number «seven»

m. a vowel (either «dīrgha», «long»; or «hrasva», «short»; or «pluta»,

«prolated») &c.

m. air breathed through the nostrils

m. N. of Viṣṇu

svara n. a musical note on

svara n. N. of various Sāmans

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

svara und svara (von 1. svar) m. n. gaṇa ardha2rcādi zu P. 2, 4, 31. am

Ende eines adj. comp. f. ā; in Ableitungen gesteigert zu sauva- gaṇa

dvārādi zu P. 7, 3, 4. VOP. 7, 4. 1) m. a) «Schall, Ton: Stimme» NAIGH. 1.

11. H. 306. 1399. an. 2, 465. MED. r. 95. fg. HALĀY. 1, 138. 5, 77.

svareṇādriṁ darayaḥ ṚV. 1, 62, 4. tīrthe sindhoradhi svare 8, 61, 7. AV.

11, 7, 5. AIT. BR. 3, 24. ŚAT. BR. 11, 4, 2, 10. fg. 14, 4, 1, 27. PAÑCAV.

BR. 11, 5, 26. vādyāṁścoccāvacasvarān R. 2, 81, 2.

svaravarṇeṅgitākāraiḥ «Stimme» M. 8, 25. śuṣkabhinnamukhasvarāḥ

YĀJÑ. 2, 267. dāruṇa MBH. 3, 16139. gāyatormadhurasvaram R. 1, 4, 28.

34, 42. dīna 42, 26. 5, 23, 1. Spr. (II) 2811. 4880. ārtasvaraṁ visṛjya R.

GORR. 2, 66, 27. kṣāma- 3, 58, 14. ghora 64, 15. gambhīra SUŚR. 1, 124,

12. dīptakhara- 107, 19. 2, 507, 11. dhīra RAGH. 3, 43. dhīrapraśānta-

ŚĀK. 27, 10. hrasva Spr. (II) 7313. karuṇa PAÑCAT. 82, 17. fg. tāra 97,

19. plāvita BHĀG. P. 6, 1, 29. mattahaṁsa- adj. R. 2, 49, 13. kalahaṁsa-

adj. 82, 9. bāṣpacchanna- adj. R. GORR. 2, 58, 34. -hīna 3, 73, 3. —

madhuratā Spr. (II) 5827. svaraścāpi vyarudhyata R. 2, 36, 10.

vyabhidyata R. GORR. 2, 36, 10. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 68, 1. 85.

gardabhajarjararūkṣasvarāḥ syuḥ 95. 69, 5. madhurasvaravihaṁgamṛga-

30, 7. 86, 15. 19. 88, 11. 15. 17. 36.

bhinnabhairavadīnārtaparuṣakṣāmajarjarāḥ 86, 36. RĀJA-TAR. 5. 373.

sagadgadasvaram SĀH. D. 59, 4. = nāsāsamīraṇa «durch die Nase

entlassene Luft» MED. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 337,b,15. der prāṇa ist svara

CHĀND. UP. 1, 3, 2. desgleichen om 4, 3. 4. HARIV. 12432. BHĀG. P. 7,

15, 53. — b) «Ton» (bei der Recitation u. s. w.), unterschieden nach

«seiner Stärke» in den drei Stufen prathama mandra nīca nīcaistara,

madhyama, uttama ucca uccaistara oder nach «Höhe» und «Tiefe» in der

Tonleiter ĀŚV. ŚR. 5, 12, 8. 17, 1. vyākhyā- 8, 13, 6. svādhyāya- LĀṬY. 1,

8, 9. prathama-, dvitīya- 2, 9, 12. mandra- 1,11,26. Schol. zu KĀTY. ŚR.

254,13. fgg. PRAJOGAR.3,b,1. SUŚR.1,13,7. uccamādau svaraṁ kṛtvā

nīcaṁ paścāt VARĀH. BṚH. S. 86, 63. uccaiḥ- adj. (Hund) 89, 6. svare

svare sapta yavāntarāṇi LĀṬY. 1, 11, 27. — c) «Ton» so v. a. «Accent»

(udātta, anudātta, svarita) AK. 1, 1, 5, 5. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 5, 77. ṚV.

PRĀT. 3, 1. fgg. mantre svarakriyā KĀTY. ŚR. 1, 8, 16. bhāṣika- 17.

svarasaṁskārau NIR. 2, 1. brāhmaṇa-, saṁhitā- Comm. zu KĀTY. ŚR. 1,

8, 17. MBH. 3, 16773. 13, 4108 (nach der Lesart der ed. Bomb.). Kār. 9

aus KĀŚ. zu P. 7, 2, 10. Schol. zu P. 6, 1, 158. — d) «ein musikalischer

Ton, Note» (deren sieben) AK.1,1,7,1. H. 1401. H. an. MED. HALĀY. Ind.

St.1,48 (auch sechs).2,67. VS. PRĀT.1,127. HARIV. 4635. 13940.

R.2,91,26. R. GORR.1,3,45.7,94,5. MĀLAV. 20. VARĀH. BṚH. S.86,40.

MĀRK. P. 23,51. BHĀG. P.2,1,36.3,12,47. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 200,b,6.

PAÑCAT. V,43. ŚUK. in LA. (III) 33,5. — e) «Vocal» H. an. MED. HALĀY.

ṚV. PRĀT.1,11. 21. 14,4. VS. PRĀT.1,39. 44. 87. AV. PRĀT.1,55. 93. TS.

PRĀT.1,5. 33 u.s.w. LĀTY.6,10,16. ŚĀÑKH. ŚR.6,1,30. KĀTY. ŚR. 19,7,6.

CHĀND. UP.2,22,3. MBH.1,309.3,16139. 14,1192. R.2,91,22. VARĀH.

BṚH. S. 96,15. MĀRK. P. 23,47. BHĀG. P.3,12,46. Verz. d. Oxf. H.

104,b,34. — f) Bez. «der Zahl sieben» (nach der Zahl der Noten) VARĀH.

BṚH. S. 12, 14. svarāṁśa «ein Siebentel» BṚH. 7, 9. — 2) f. ā N. der

ersten Gemahlin Brahman’s PĀDMOTTARAKH. KĀRTTIKAM. 156 im

ŚKDR. — 3) n. Bez. gewisser Sāman (vgl. svarasāman) ŚĀÑKH. BR. 24, 5.

8. LĀṬY. 1, 6, 48. 7, 3, 11. Schol. zu PAÑCAV. BR. 4, 5, 1. ĀŚV. ŚR. 8, 5,

11. -pṛṣṭha ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 11, 11, 3. 12, 10. LĀṬY. 4, 6, 16. vāyoḥ svaram

(v. l. sparam) Ind. St.4,235,a. — Vgl. a-, ṛṣi-, caturtha-, tṛtīya-, dvitīya-,

ni-, prati-, prathama-, bhīṣmasvararāja, mañju-, madhu-, madhura-,

manojña-, mahā-, megha-, vi-, vyākhyā-, śikṣā-, śukta-, sa-, sama-, sa-,

sauvara.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

svara svara, i. e. svṛ + a, m.

1. Sound, Pañc. 82, 17; voice, Pañc. v. d. 83.

2. Snoring.

3. A note in music, Pañc. v. d. 43.

4. A vowel.

5. Accent, Sāv. 5, 25.

— Comp. a-, adj. low, indistinct, Rām. 2, 42, 26. tāra-, m. loud sound or

voice, Pañc. 97, 19; 107, 5. bhinna- (vb. bhid), adj. 1. faltering in speech.

2. hoarse. mahā-, adj. crying aloud, Rām. 3, 55, 32. vi-, adj. discordant,

inharmonious. su-, adj. loud, Chr. 12, 28.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

svara m. sound, voice, accent, musical tone or note.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

svara svar-a, (or a), m. V., C.: sound, noise; C.: voice; S., C.: tone (in

recitation etc., distinguished according to strength or pitch); accent;

musical note (there being seven or six); vowel.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

svara t ka ākṣepe . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. (adanta-curā°-para°-saka°-seṭ

.) vakārayuktaḥ rephopadhaḥ . svarayatyatiruṣṭo’pi na kañcana

parigraham . iti halāyudhaḥ . pañcamasvarayuktaḥ . iti caturbhujaḥ .

svarayati . iti durgādāsaḥ ..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

svara ākṣepe ada° curā° ubha° saka° seṭ . svarayati—te asasvarat—ta .

svara pu° svara—ac svṛ—ap vā . 1 udāttānudāttasvaritarūpe

varṇoccāraṇayatnabhede tādṛśasvaravattvācca 2 vyañjanabhinnavarṇeṣu

akārādiṣu śikṣā . tantrokte 2 prāṇādivāyorvyāpārabhede 3 kākvādikṛte

varṇādyuccāraṇadhvaniviśeṣe 4 niṣādādiṣu tantrīkaṇṭhottheṣu

gānajadhvaniṣu ca amaraḥ . udāttaścānudāttaśca svaritaśca svarāstrayaḥ

śikṣā° akārādīnāṁ svayaṁrājamānatvāt svaravattvācca

svarapadābhidheyatā, acaḥ svayaṁ virojante halastu paragāminaḥ ityukte

. yadāttaścādudāttaśca svaritaśca svarāstrayaḥ . hrasvo dīrghaḥ

plutaśceti kālato nitamā aci śikṣokteśca . niṣādādisavarāṇāṁ

prāṇibhedasvaratulyatā nāradenoktā yathā ṣaḍjaṁ rauti mayūro hi dṛṣo

nardati carṣabham . ajā virauti gāndhāraṁ krauñco nardati madhyamam .

puṣpasādhāraṇe kāle kokilo rauti pañcamam . aśvaśca dhaivataṁ rauti

niṣādaṁ rauti kuñjaraḥ iti . aśvastu dhaivataṁ so’pi mattaḥ

pañcamasaṁjñakam . niṣādantu gajo garjatyunmado’sau sapañcamam iti

. bharato’pyāha ṣaḍjañca pañcamañceti mayūro nadati dvidhā . aśvādyā

dhaivatādīṁśca prāhurmattāśca pañcamam iti . niṣādādiśabdaniruktiśca

niṣīdanti svarā asminniṣādastena hetunā . aśeṣasandhiviṣayaṁ sa hi

vyāpyāvatiṣṭhate . vāyuḥ samudgato nābheḥ kaṇṭhaśīrṣasamudgataḥ .

nadatyṛdhabhavad yasmāttainaipa ṛṣabhaḥ smṛtaḥ vāyuḥ samudgato

nābheḥ kaṇṭhaśīrṣaṁsamāhataḥ . nānāgandhavahaḥ puṇyo

gāndhārastena hetunā . nāsāṁ kaṇṭhamurastālujihvāṁ dantāṁśca

saṁśritaḥ . ṣaḍbhyaḥ saṁ jāyate yasmāttasmāt ṣaḍja iti smṛtaḥ .

tadvadevotthito vāyururaḥkaṇṭhasamāhataḥ . nābhiprāpto mahānādo

madhyabhastena sa smṛtaḥ . abhisandhayate yasmāt svarāṁsteneṣa

dhaivataḥ . sa tu tāvat pradhānatvāt lalāṭe vyavatiṣṭhate . vāyuḥ

samudgato nābherurohṛtkaṇṭhamūrdhasu . vicaran

pañcamasthānaprāptyā pañcama ucyate . sa svaro yaḥ śrutisthāne

svaran hṛdayarañjakaḥ . ṣaḍja ṛṣabhagāndhārā madhyamaḥ

pañcamastathā . dhaivataśca niṣādaśca svarāḥ sapta prakīrtitāḥ bharataḥ

. bālādisvarāśca cakraśabde 2811 pṛ° dṛśyāḥ .

स्वरः — svaraḥ Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

svaraḥ [svar-ac, svṛ-ap vā]

(1) Sound, noise.

(2) Voice; svareṇa tasyāmamṛtasrutave prajalpitāyāmabhijātavāci Ku.

1. 45.

(3) A note of the musical scale or gamut, a tone, tune; (these are

seven: —niṣādarṣabhagāṁdhāraṣaḍjamadhyamadhaivatāḥ ..

paṁcamaścetyamī sapta taṁtrīkaṁṭhotthitāḥ svarāḥ Ak.).

(4) The number ‘seven’.

(5) A vowel.

(6) An accent; (these are three; udātta, anudātta, and svarita q. q. v.

v.).

(7) Air breathed through the nostrils.

(3) Snoring. —rā N. of the chief wife of Brahman.

— Comp.

—aṁśaḥ a half or quarter tone (in music).

—aṁtaraṁ the interval between two vowels, hiatus.

—udaya a. followed by a vowel. (

—yaḥ) the production of sound.

—upadha a. preceded by a vowel.

—grāmaḥ the musical scale, gamut.

—pattanaṁ N. of the Sāma-veda.

—baddha composed in musical measure.

—bhaktiḥ f. a vowel-sound phonetically inserted in the

pronunciation of r or l when these letters are followed by a sibilant or any

single consonant; (e. g. varṣa pronounced as variṣa). —bhaṁgaḥ 1

indistinctness of utterance, broken articulation. —2. hoarseness or

cracking of voice.

—maṁḍala the circle of notes, arrangement of musical scales; Pt.

5. 54.

—maṁḍalikā a kind of lute (vīṇā). —lāsikā a flute, pipe.

—śūnya a. without musical notes, unmelodious, unmusical.

—saṁyogaḥ 1. the junction of vowels —2. the union of notes or

sounds, i. e. voice; anya evaiṣa svarasaṁyogaḥ Mk. 1, 3; U. 3;

paṁḍitakauśikyā iva svarasaṁyogaḥ śrūyate M. 5.

—saṁkramaḥ 1. a transition or succession of notes; taṁ tasya

svarasaṁkramaṁ mṛdugiraḥ śliṣṭaṁ ca taṁtrīsvaṁnam Mk. 3. 5.

(2) the gamut. —saṁdhiḥ the coalition of vowels. —sāman m. pl.

epithets of particular days in a sacrificial session.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

svaraḥ puṁ, (svara + ac) udāttāditrayaḥ . ityamaraḥ . 1 . 6 . 4 ..

udāttānudāttasvaritāstrayaḥ svaraśabdavācyāḥ . svaranti śabdāyante

svarāḥ svṛ ū śabdopatāpayoḥ an uccairādīyate uccāryate udāttaḥ

udāṅpūrvāddāñaḥ karmaṇi ktaḥ . tadviparīto’nudāttaḥ . samāhṛtaḥ

svaritaḥ svaraḥ sañjāto’treti ito’sya jāte iti itaḥ . yadāhuḥ .

uccairuccāraṇādudāttaḥ . nīcairanudāttaḥ . samāhāraḥ svaritaḥ . iti .

chāndasatvāt noktaḥ . taduktaṁ udāttaścānudāttaśca svaritaśca

pracitasvaro trayaḥ svarāḥ . caturthaḥ pracito nokto yato’sau chāndasaḥ

smṛtaḥ .. iti bharataḥ .. (yathā, māghe . 2 . 95 .

tadośitāraṁ cedīnāṁ bhavāṁstamavamaṁsta mā .

nihantyarīnekapade ya udāttaḥ svarāniva ..)

tantrokaṇṭhotthitaniṣādādisaptadhvaniḥ . sura iti bhāṣā . yathā —

niṣādarṣabhagāndhāraṣaḍjamadhyamadhaivatāḥ .

pañcamaścetyamī sapta tantrīkaṇṭhotthitāḥ svarāḥ .. ityamaraḥ . 1 . 7

. 1 .. niṣādādayaḥ sapta tantrosamutthāḥ kaṇṭhasamutthāśca svarāḥ

svaraśabdavācyāḥ . niṣādādikadambādi yathākramamiti sthitamiti .

nārado’pyāha .

ṣaḍjaṁ rauti mayūro hi gāvo nardanti carṣabham .

ajā virauti gāndhāraṁ krauñco nadati madhyamam .

puṣpasādhāraṇe kāle kokilo rauti pañcamam .

aśvaśca dhaivataṁ rauti niṣādaṁ rauti kuñjaraḥ .. iti . anyo’pyāha .

sa svaro yaḥ śrutisthāne svanan hṛdayarañlakaḥ ..

ṣaḍjarṣabhagāndhāro madhyamaḥ pañcamastathā .

dhaivataśca niṣādaśca svarāḥ sapta prakīrtitāḥ ..

mayūravṛṣabhaśchāgakrauñcakokilavājinaḥ .

mātaṅgaśca krameṇāhuḥ svarānetān sudurgamān .. iti .. ete ca

samadāḥ pañcamaṁ gāyantī . tathā ca viśākhinaḥ .

aśvastu dhaivataṁ so’pi mattaḥ pañcamasaṁjñakam .

niṣādantu gajo garjatyunmado’sau sapañcamamiti .. bharato’pyāha .

ṣaḍjañca pañcamañceti mayūro nadati dvidhā .

aśvādyā dhaiva tādīṁśca prāhurmattāśca pañcamamiti .. niṣīdanti

svarā asminniti niṣādaḥ saderādhāre ghañ gīka iti ṣatvam . tathā ca .

niṣīdanti svarā asminniṣādastena hetunā . aśeṣasandhiviṣayaṁ sa hi

vyāpyāvatiṣṭhate .. ṛṣati ṛtuṁ ṛṣabhaḥ ṛṣī śa gatau nāmnīti kabhaḥ .

vāyuḥ samudgato nāmaḥ kaṇṭhaśīrṣasamudgataḥ .

nadatyṛṣabhavadyasmāttenaiṣa ṛṣabhaḥ smṛtaḥ .. iti . gandhānāṁ

samūho gāndhaṁ ṣṇaḥ svarāntasya gāndhaṁ iyarti gāndhāraḥ ṛrli gatyāṁ

ḍhāt ṣaṇiti ṣaṇ .

vāyuḥ samudgato nābheḥ kaṇṭhaśīrṣasamāhataḥ .

nānāgandhavahaḥ puṇyo gāndhārastena hetunā .. iti .

nāndhāro’bhijano’syeti gāndhāra ityanye . ṣaḍbhyo jāyate ṣaḍjaḥ

hanajanāditi ḍaḥ . nāsāṁ kaṇṭhamurastālu jihvāṁ dantāṁñca saṁśritaḥ .

ṣaḍbhyaḥ saṁjāyate yasmāttasmāt ṣaḍja iti smṛtaḥ .. iti . madhye

nābhideśe bhavo madhyamaḥ . tatrādyaciradakṣiṇetyādinā maḥ .

tadvadevotthito vāyururaḥkaṇṭhasamāhṛtaḥ .

nābhiprāpto mahānādo madhyamastena sa smṛtaḥ .. iti .

dhīmadbhirgīyateṁ iti dhaivataḥ ḍhaghekāditi ṣṇaḥ manīṣāditvāt masya

vaḥ . dhīyate’yamiti vikārasaṁgheti ṣṇo vā . svarān dhayatīti vā . dheṭa

pāne nāmnīti dhaivataḥ .

abhisandhayate yasmāt svarāṁstenaiṣa dhaivataḥ .

sa tu tāvatpradhānatvāt lalāṭe vyavatiṣṭhate .. iti pañcānāṁ svarāṇāṁ

pūraṇaḥ pañcam . no saṅkhyādermaḍiti maṭ . vāyuḥ samudgato

nābherūrau hṛtkaṇṭhamūrdhvasu . vicaran pañcamasthānaprāptyā

pañcama ucyate .. iti . svaranti śabdāyante svarāḥ svṛ ū śabdopatāpayoḥ

pacāditvādan . iti bharataḥ .. * .. api ca .

sa svaro yaḥ śrutisthāne svaran hṛdayarañjakaḥ ..

ṣaḍjaṛṣabhagāndhārā madhyamaḥ pañcamastathā .

dhaivataśca niṣādaśca svarāḥ sapta prakīrtitāḥ ..

mayūravṛṣabhacchāgīkroṣṭukokilavājinaḥ .

mataṅgāśca krameṇāhuḥ svarānetān sudurgamān ..

ṛṣabhaṁ cātako vakti dhaivatañcāpi dardaraḥ . iti kecit ..

vāyuḥ saṁmūrchito nābhernāḍyāśca hṛdayasya ca .

pārśvayormastakasyāpi ṣaṇṇāṁ ṣaḍjaḥ prajāyate .

nābhibhūlādyadā varṇa utthitaḥ kurute dhvanim .

vṛṣabhasyeva niryāti helayā ṛṣabhaḥ smṛtaḥ ..

nābheḥ samudgato vāyurgandhaṁ śrotre ca cālayan .

saśabdastena niryāti gāndhārastena kathyate ..

madhyamo madhyamasthānāt śarīrasyopajāyate .

nābhimūlācca gambhīraḥ kiñcittāraḥ svabhāvataḥ ..

prāṇo’pānaḥ samānaśca udāno vyāna eva ca .

eteṣāṁ samavāyena jāyate pañcamaḥ svaraḥ ..

gatvā nābheradhobhāgaṁ vasti prāpyordhvagaḥ punaḥ .

dhāvanniva ca yo yāti kaṇṭhadeśaṁ sa dhaivataḥ ..

ṣaḍjādayaḥ ṣaḍete’tra svarāḥ sarve manoharāḥ .

niṣīdanti yato loke niṣādastena kathyate .. * ..

catasraḥ pañcame ṣaḍaje madhyame śratayo matāḥ .

ṛṣabhe dhaivate tisro dve gāndhāraniṣādake .. * .. saṁpūrṇasvarāḥ .

ṣa ṛ ga ma pa dha ni . ṣāḍavāḥ niṣādojjhitāḥ . ṣa ṛ ga ma pa dha .

oḍavasvarāḥ ṛ-pa-varjitāḥ . ṣa ga ma dha ni . saṁpūrṇarāgāḥ saptabhiḥ

svarairyathā nāṭavasantādayaḥ . ṣāḍavarāgāḥ ṣaḍbhiḥ svarairyathā

mallārādayaḥ . adhunā svaraprastāraḥ .

krameṇaiva svarāḥ sthāpyāḥ pūrbapūrbaparādadhaḥ .

mūlakramaḥ kramāt pṛṣṭhe purasthaparivartinaḥ ..

sa cedupari tatpūrba itthaṁ prastāraṇakramaḥ .. * .. atha

svaraprastāre

piṅgalavannaṣṭoddiṣṭamerupatākāsūcīsaptasāgaraprabhṛtayaḥ santi

granthavistārabhayānnoktāḥ .

kaṁsārervaṁśikāvādye svarāḥ sapta cakāśire . iti

śubhaṅkarakṛtasaṅgītadāmodaraḥ .. * .. * .. akārādivarṇāḥ . iti medinī ..

tasya nāmāntaraṁ ac 2 . iti vopadevaḥ .. mātrā 3 . iti svarodayaḥ .. te ca

hrasvadīrghaplutā bhavanti yathā —

ekamātro bhavet hrasvo dvimātro dīrgha ucyate .

trimātrastu pluto jñeyo vyañjanaṁ cārdhamātrakam .. iti

mugdhabodhaṭīkāyāṁ durgādāsaḥ .. svaravarṇā yathā . a ā i ī u ū ṛ ṝ ḷ ḹ e

ai o au aṁ aḥ . eteṣāṁ utpattisthānāni yathā . atrayaṁ e-ha-ka-kha-ga-

gha-ṅāḥ kaṇṭhyāḥ . itrayaṁ ca-cha-ja-jha-ña-śā e-ai yāstālavyāḥ .

ṛtrayaṁ ṭa-ṭha-ḍa-ḍha-ṇa-ra ṣā mūrdhanyāḥ . ḷtrayaṁ ta-tha-da-dha-na-

la-sā vo dantyāḥ . utrayaṁ pa-pha-ba-bha-ma-vā o-au oṣṭhyāḥ . iti

mugdhabodhavyākaraṇam .. e-haka-kha-ga-gha-ṅā ityekapadoktyā eṣāṁ

utpattisthānaṁ kaṇṭhamuktvā paścāt e ai ityubhayaṁ

tālavyakāryārthaṁtālavyamadhye’pi e-ai-yā iti bhinnapade paṭhitavān . o

au ityubhayamoṣṭhakāryārthamoṣṭhyamadhye’pi o au oṣṭhyā iti

bhinnapade paṭhitavān . tālavyakāryañca ivarṇasya samatvāt guṇa ekāraḥ

vṛddhiraikāraḥ . ukārasya guṇa okāraḥ vṛddhiraukāraḥ . nanu e ai o au

caturṇāṁ svabhāvāt kaṇṭhajātānāmapi tālavyauṣṭhyakāryakāritvaṁ

kathamiti cenna yataḥ kuntyā prasūtasya karṇasya rādhāpratipālanāt

rādheyatvaṁ saṁgacchate . iti taṭṭīkāyāṁ durgādāsaḥ .. * .. anyacca .

mātṛkāyāṁ svarāḥ proktāḥ svarāḥ ṣoḍaśasaṅkhyayā .

teṣāṁ dvāvantimau tyājyau catvāraśca napuṁsakāḥ ..

śeṣā daśa svarāsteṣu sthādekaiko dvike dvike .

jñeyā ato’svarādyāśca hrasvāḥ pañca svarodaye ..

svarā hi mātṛkoccārā mātrāvyāptaṁ jagattrayam .

tasmāt svarodbhavaṁ sarvaṁ trailokyaṁ sacarācaram ..

akārādisvarāḥ pañca brahmādyāḥ pañcadevatāḥ .

nivṛttyādyāḥ kalāḥ pañca icchādyaṁ śaktipañcakam ..

mayādyāścakrabhedāśca dharādyaṁ bhūtapañcakam .

gandhādyā viṣayāste ca kāmabāṇā itīritāḥ .

piṇḍaṁ padaṁ tathā rūpaṁ rūpātītaṁ nirañjanam .

svarabhede sthitaṁ jñānaṁ jñāyate gurutaḥ sadā ..

akārādisvarāḥ pañca teṣāmaṣṭau bhidāstvamūḥ .

mātrāvarṇo graho jīvo rāśirbhaṁ piṇḍayogakau prasupto bhāṣate yena

yenāgacchati śabditaḥ .

tatra nāmnyādyavarṇe yā mātrā mātrāsvaraḥ sahi .. iti

mātrāsvaracakram .. *

kādihāntān likhedvarṇān svarādho ṅa ñaṇojjhitān .

tiryak paḍktikameṇaiva pañcatriṁśat prakoṣṭhake ..

naranāmādimo varṇo yasmāt svarādadhaḥ sthitaḥ .

sa svarastasya varṇasya varṇasvara ihocyate ..

sa proktā ṅa-ña-ṇā varṇā nāmādau santi te na hi .

vedbhavanti tadā jñeyā ga-ja ḍāste yathākramam ..

yadi nāmni bhavedvarṇaḥ saṁyuktākṣaralakṣaṇaḥ .

grāhyastasyādimo varṇa ityuktaṁ brahmayāmale .. iti

varṇasvaracakram .. * .. asvare meṣasiṁhāliḥ kanyāyugmakakarkaṭāḥ .

usvare ca dhanurmīnau esvare ca tulāvṛṣau .. osvare mṛgakumbhau ca

rāśisambhūgrahasvarāḥ . svarādhaḥ sthāpayet kheṭaṁ rāśeryo yasya

nāyakaḥ .. meṣavṛścikayorbhaumaḥ śukrā vṛṣatulābhṛtoḥ . budhaḥ

kanyābhiyunayoḥ karkaṭasya ca candramāḥ .. syānmīnadhanuṣorjīvaḥ

śanirmakarakumbhayoḥ . siṁhāsyādhipatiḥ sūryaḥ kathito gaṇakottamaiḥ

.. iti grahasvaracakram .. * ..

ṣoḍaśākṣaro’vargaḥ syāt kādivargāstu pañcakāḥ .

caturarṇau ya[…] vargau saṅkhyā vargeṣu kīrtitāḥ ..

nāmno varṇāḥ svarā grāhyā vargāṇāṁ varṇasaṁkhyayā .

piṇḍitāḥ pañcabhirbhaktāḥ śeṣaṁ jīvasvaraṁ viduḥ .. iti

jīvasvaracakram .. * ..

meṣavṛṣāvakāre ca mithunādyāḥ ṣaḍaṁśakāḥ .

mithunāṁśāstrayaścaiva ikāre siṁhakarkaṭau .

kanyā tulā ukāre ca vṛścikasya trayo’ṁśakāḥ .

ekāre vṛṣṭikasyāntyāḥ kārmukaḥ ṣaḍmṛgādimāḥ ..

aṁśāstrayo mṛgāsyāntyāḥ kumbhamīnau tathā svare .

evaṁ rāśisvaraḥ prokto navāṁśaprakramodayaḥ .. iti rāśisvaracakram

.. * ..

akāre sapta ṛkṣāṇi revatyādikrameṇa ca .

pañca pañca ikārādāvevamṛkṣasvarodayaḥ .. iti nakṣatrasvaracakram

.. * ..

mātrā varṇasvarāt saṅkyā saṅkhyā jīvasvarāttathā .

piṇḍīkṛte svaraiḥ śeṣaḥ piṇḍasvara ihocyate .. iti piṇḍasvaracakram ..

* ..

mātrādivarṇabhedena svarānutpādya nāmataḥ .

yoge śarahṛte tatra śeṣo dogasvaro mataḥ .. iti yogasvaracakram ..

proktā naisargikāścāṣṭau mātrādyā nāmajāḥ svarā .. * ..

mātrādisvaracakrabalena kartavyakarmāṇi yathā —

sādhanaṁ mantrayantrasya yantrayogañca sarvadā .

adhomukhāni karmāṇi mātrāsvarabale kuru .. * ..

varṇasvarabale sarvaṁ kartavyañca śubhāśubham .

siddhidaḥ sarvakāryeṣu yuddhakāle viśeṣataḥ .. * ..

māraṇaṁ mohanaṁ stambhaṁ vidveṣoccāṭane vaśam .

vivādaṁ vigrahaṁ vātaṁ kuryādgrahasvarodaye .. * ..

yānapānādikaṁ sarvaṁ vastrālaṅkārabhūṣaṇam .

vidyārambhāṁvivāhañca kuryāt jīvasvarodaye .. * ..

prāsādārāmaharmyāṇi devatāsthāpanāni ca .

rājābhiṣecanaṁ dīkṣā kartavyaṁ rāśike svare .. * ..

śāntikaṁ pīṣṭikañcaiva praveśo vījavāpanam .

strīvivāhastathā yātrā kartavyā bhasvarodaye .. * ..

śatrūṇāṁ deśabhaṅgaśca kauṭayuddhañca veṣṭanam .

senādhyakṣastathā mantro kartavyaḥ piṇḍakodaye .. * ..

yogena sādhayed yogaṁ dehasthaṁ jñānasambhavam .

āṇavaṁ śāmbhavañcaiva śākteyañca tṛtīyakam .. * ..

tithivārau ca nakṣatraṁ pṛthak pṛthak prabhāṣitam .

yat tadekatra sanmilya kuryādvarṇasvarodaye .

yasya nāmādiko varṇastithivārarkṣajaṁ mṛtam .

taddinaṁ varjayettasya hānimṛtyukaraṁ yataḥ ..

anena svarayogena śatrūṇāṁ māraṇādikam .

mantrayantrakriyāṁ mohaṁ sādhayettaddine budhaḥ .. ityādi

narapatijayacaryāsvarodayadhṛtabrahmayāmalam .. * .. nāsāvāyuḥ . iti

medinī .. tatra ajapājapramāṇaṁ yathā —

haṁsa haṁseti yanmantraṁ jīvo japati sarvadā .

śataiḥ ṣaḍbhiśca yuktāni sahasrāṇyekaviṁśatiḥ ..

ajapā nāma gāyattrī yogināṁ mokṣasādhanam .

asyāḥ saṅkalpamātreṇa sarvapāpaiḥ pramucyate .. iti mahābhārate

āśvamedhikaparvaṇi uttaragītā .. * .. api ca .

iḍā ca piṅgalā caiva nāsikādvāragāminī .

āmūlādbrahmadvārāntaṁ suṣumnā madhyagāminī ..

vahatyūrdhvamukhenaiva prāṇavāyuśca sarvadā .

pānaṁ karotyapānaśca adhovaktreṇa caiva hi ..

śaktirūpaḥ sthitaścandro vāmanāsāpravāhakaḥ .

śivarūpadharaḥ sūryo dakṣanāsāpuṭe tathā ..

hakāre niḥsaredvāyuḥ sakāraśca praveśane .

ajapānāmagāyattrīṁ jīvo japatyaharniśam .. * ..

muktimopāne’pyuktam .

ṣaṭśatāni divārātrau sahasrāṇyekaviṁśatiḥ .

etatsaṅkhyaṁ mahāmantra jīvo japati sarvadā ..

brāhmye muhūrte yogīndro japamevaṁ samarpayet .

samarpaṇakramaścaiva ucyate gurutastataḥ ..

mūlādhāre gaṇeśāya ṣaṭśatañca samarpayet .

tatraivaḥbrahmaṇe nityaṁ ṣaṭsahasraṁ nivedayet ..

svādhiṣṭhāne ca haraye ṣaṭsahasraṁ nivedayet .

ṣaṭsahasraṁ maṇipūre harāya ca samarpayet ..

jīvātmane sahasrañca tatraiva parikalpayet .

paramātmane sahasrantu anāhate nivedayet ..

sahasrantu paramaśive sahasrāre samarpayet .

evaṁ samarpayedyastu pāpaiḥ puṇyairna lipyate .. iti

śropūrṇānandatiracitaśrītattvacintāmaṇau tattvasāraparicchede

ṣaṭcakrakathanam .. * .. anyat svarodayaśabde draṣṭavyam .. * .. * ..

atha pakṣisvarajñānam .

potakīrutavicāramidānīṁ kūrmahe yamadhigamya manuṣyaḥ .

bhāvikarmaphalapākaparīkṣāstatakṣamo bhavati yogisadṛkṣaḥ ..

lābhadaścili cilīti ninādaḥ śūki śūli ninado’pi tathaiva .

kuci kuci ninado’pi jalārthe vyāhataḥ kūci kūci svarayuktaiḥ ..

kīru kīru iti yo madhuro’sau kāmatastu ninadāḥ skhalitākhyāḥ .

syādbhayāya niyamena ca cī cirnisvano hyasukunāda ihārthaḥ ..

kaṣṭadaściri cirīti tirāvaścīkucīkuriti cānyavirāvī .

evamīdṛśaphalā daśa nādāḥ prasphuṭā nigaditā bhagavatyā ..

pratyekamākhyātaphalaṁ narāṇāṁ yasmin daśānāṁ śakunasvarāṇām

.

jānātyavaśyaṁ puruṣo viśeṣaṁ prayojanaṁ bhāvi sa vettyaśeṣam .. *

..

vāmo ninādaḥ phaladaḥ pravāse syāddakṣiṇe’narthaphalāptihetuḥ .

pṛṣṭhasthitānāṁ phalakṛcca pṛṣṭhe niṣedhakārī punaragrabhāge ..

yuddhapraveśe’tha gṛhapraveśe śreyaḥ pradadyānninado’pasavyaḥ .

vāmaḥ punaḥ pāṇḍavayuddhavatyā bhavatyabhīṣṭapratikūlavartī .. * ..

pārthivañcilicilisvara uktaḥ śūli śūliriti yaḥ sa tathaiva .

kūci kūci kuci kucīti ca śabdaṁ dvāvimau nigaditau punarāpyau ..

kīru kaururiti taijasasaṁjñastaijasāśca ninadāḥ skhalitākhyāḥ .

mārutāvapi cilisvanavīcinisvanau nigaditau munimukhyaiḥ ..

ambaraściri cirīti ninādaścīku cokuriti tādṛśa eva .

pañca caiva ninadā daśa nādā bhūtapañcakanivāsabhavena ..

kramādamī pārthivanādapūrbāḥ pañcāpi śabdāḥ śakunaikadevyāḥ .

bhavanti caitanniyataṁ bhavanti phalāni pūrṇānyacireṇa puṁsām ..

krameṇa pṛthvījalapāvakānāṁ bhavanti śabdā yadi kṛṣṇikāyāḥ .

manorathebhyo’bhyadhikāni tūrṇaṁ tadā phalāni dhruvamudvahanti ..

anantaraṁ pārthivanādataścedvahnisbarastatphalamakṣataṁ syāt .

vāyavyaśabdau yadi nābhasau vā bhūtvā phalaṁ naśyati tat

samastam ..

śāntau ninādau pṛthivījalākhyau dīptau samīrāmbaranāmadheyau .

tejaḥpradhāno vijayāvalambī bhavet samaṁ yena phalena tādṛk

śubheṣu kāryeṣvaśubhāya śāntau dīptau bhayādau bhayanāśanāya .

viparyaye dvāvapi na praśastāvastitvanā stitvaphalau yatastau .. iti

vasantarājaśākune svaraprakaraṇam ..

हय — haya Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899haya m. (ifc. f. «ā»; fr. 1. «hi») a horse &c. &c.

m. a symbolical expression for the number «seven» (on account of the

7 horses of the Sun)

m. the zodiacal sign Sagittarius

haya m. (in prosody) a foot of four short syllables, proceleusmaticus

m. a man of a partic. class

m. the Yak or Bos Grunniens

m. N. of Indra

m. of one of the horses of the Moon

m. of a son of Sahasra-da

m. of a son of śatā-jit

haya pl. the family of Haya

haya m. («ā», or «ī») f. a female horse, mare

m. Physalis Flexuosa

haya mfn. urging on, driving (see «aśva-haya»).

haya &c. see p.1288, cols. 2, 3.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

haya (von hi, hinoti) 1) m. gaṇa vṛṣādi zu P. 6, 1, 203. a) «Ross» NAIGH.

1, 14. AK. 1, 1, 1, 41. 2, 8, 2, 12. H. 1233. HALĀY. 2, 281. ṚV. 5, 46, 1. 7,

74, 4. 9, 107, 25. VS. 7, 47. 22, 19. 23, 14. AIT. BR. 8, 22. ŚAT. BR. 10, 6,

4, 1. 13, 5, 4, 21. ĀŚV. ŚR. 3, 4, 10. M. 8, 296. 11, 136. BHAG. 1, 14.

MBH. 3, 2294. 2639. 2786. -saṁgrahaṇa 2796. 4, 319. -vikrānta HARIV.

3109. Spr. (II) 1236. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 5, 66. 9, 43. 43, 35. 44, 17. -ceṣṭita

93,15. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 13,b,7. 24. fgg. 28. RĀJA-TAR.4,265. BHĀG.

P.4,16,24. VET. in LA. (III) 11,18. am Ende eines adj. comp. f. ā MBH. 18,

21. RAGH. 9, 10. — b) N. pr. eines der «Rosse» des Mondgottes VYĀḌI

beim Schol. zu H. 104. — c) Bez. «der Zahl sieben» (wegen der «sieben

Rosse» des Sonnengottes) ŚRUT. 42. — d) «der Schütze im Thierkreise»

(vgl. hayāṅga) VARĀH. BṚH. S. 102, 7. BṚH. 11, 7. 10. 23 (21), 15. — e)

«ein Fuss von vier Moren» COLEBR. Misc. Ess. 2, 151. — f) N. pr. eines

Sohnes des Sahasrada HARIV. 1844. des Śatājit VP. 416. pl. «das

Geschlecht des» Haja MBH. 2, 333. 335. — g) «a man of particular class;

Bos grunniens» und ein N. Indra’s WILSON nach ŚABDĀRTHAK. — 2) f. ā

a) «Stute» HARIV. 2107. fg. KATHĀS. 37, 167. Schol. zu LĀṬY. 2, 7, 26. —

b) = hayī b) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — 3) f. ī a) «Stute» Vārtt. 2 zu P. 4, 1, 63.

gaṇa gaurādizu 41. JAṬĀDH. im ŚKDR. ŚATR. 14, 109. Schol. zu LĀṬY. 2,

7, 26, v. l. — b) = aśvagandhā «Physalis flexuosa» RĀJAN. 4, 111. — Vgl.

aśva-, mahā-, mahāsu-, veṇu-, śveta-, hari-.

haya 1) m. a) «Ross.» Am Ende eines adj. Comp. f. ā b) «der Schütze im

Thierkreise.» c) Bez. «der Zahl sieben» (wegen der «7 Rosse» des

Sonnengottes). d) «ein Fuss von vier Moren.» e) «a man of particular

class.» f) «Bos grunniens.» g) Bein. Indra’s. h) N.pr. a) eines der Rosse

des Mondgottes. b) eines Sohnes des Sahasrada und des Śatājit. Pl. «das

Geschlecht des Haja.» 2) hayā und hayī a) «Stute.» b) «Physalis flexuosa.»

3) Adj. «antreibend» in aśvahaya

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

haya haya, i. e. hi + a,

I. m.

1. A horse, Vikr. d. 4.

2. A man of a particular class.

3. Indra.

II. f. yī, A mare.

— Comp. hari-, m. 1. Indra, Johns. Sel. 19, 88.

2. the sun.

3. Skanda, the god of war.

4. Ganeśa.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

haya m. horse; f. hayā & hayī mare.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

haya hay-a, m. [speeder: hi] steed, horse; a. urgine on (in aśva-haya);

-kovida, a. skilled in horses;

-grīva, a. having the mane of a horse; m. a form of Viṣṇu; N. of an

Asura and of various men;

-jña, a. skilled in horses: -tā, f. knowledge of horses;

-jñā-na, n. id.;

-tattva-jña, a. knowing the true nature of horses;

-pa, m. groom; N. of a king;

-pati, m. N. of a king;

-medha, m. horse sacrifice;

-līlāvatī, f. T. of a treatise on horses;

-vidyā, f. art of managing horses;

-śāstra, n. id.;

-śiras, n. horse’s head;

-śiśu m. foal;

-saṁgrahaṇa, a. curbing of horses.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

haya klame . gatau . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. (bhvā°para°-klame aka°-gatau

saka°-seṭ .) hayati . klamo glāniḥ . iti durgādāsaḥ ..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

haya gatau saka° klānto aka° bhvā° pa° seṭa . hayati ahayīt .

haya puṁstrī° haya—hi—vā ac . 1 thoṭake amaraḥ striyāṁ yopadhatve’pi

hayagavayetyādinā ṅīṣ . aśvaśabde dṛśyam . tatra varṇyapadārthāḥ

kavisa° uktā yathā aunanyaṁ vegastejaśca tathā sallakṣaṇasthitiḥ .

khurotkhātarajo rūpaṁ jātirgativicitratā . tasya śakunādyuktaṁ

vasantarājaśākune yathā heṣāravaṁ muñcati vāmatāyaḥ

kṣaṇakṣatirdakṣirṇapādaghātai . kaṇḍūyate dakṣiṇamaṅgabhāgaṁ

tuṅgaṁ turaṅgaḥ sa pada dadāti

हयः — hayaḥ Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

hayaḥ [hay-hi-vā ac]

(1) A horse; Bg. 1. 14; Ms. 8. 296, R. 9. 10.

(2) A man of a particular class; see under aśva.

(3) The number ‘seven’.

(4) N. of Indra.

(5) (In prosody) A foot of four short syllables.

— Comp.

—adhyakṣaḥ a superintendent of horses.

—ariḥ the fragrant oleander.

—āyurvedaḥ veterinary science.

—ārūḍhaḥ a horseman, rider.

—ārohaḥ 1. a rider. —2. riding.

—āsanī the gum-olibanum tree.

—iṣṭaḥ barley.

—uttamaḥ an excellent horse.

—kovida a. versed in the science of horses-their management,

training &c.

—grīvaḥ N. of a form of Viṣṇu. (

—vā) N. of Durgā.

—jñaḥ a horse-dealer, groom, jockey.

—dviṣat m. the buffalo.

—priyaḥ barley.

—priyā the Kharjuri tree.

—māraḥ, —mārakaḥ the fragrant oleander.

—māraṇaḥ the sacred fig-tree.

—medhaḥ a horse-sacrifice; Y. 1. 181.

—vāhanaḥ an epithet of Kubera.

—śālā a stable for horses.

—śāstraṁ the art or science of training and managing horses.

—saṁgrahaṇaṁ the restraining or curbing of horses.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

hayaḥ puṁ, (hayati gacchatīti . haya + ac . hinotīti . hi + ac vā .)

ghoṭakaḥ . ityamaraḥ . 2 . 8 . 44 .. atha hayāyurvedaḥ .

dhanvantariruvāca .

hayāyurvedamākhyāsye hayaiḥ sarvārtharakṣaṇam .

kākuṭī kṛṣṇajihvaśca kṛṣṇākhyaḥ kṛṣṇatālukaḥ ..

karālī hīnadantaśca śṛṅgī cādhikadantakaḥ .

ekāṇḍaścaiva jātāṇḍaḥ kañcukī dvikhurī stanī ..

mārjārapādo vyāghrābhaḥ kuṣṭhavidrudhisannibhaḥ .

yamajo vāmanaścaiva mārjārakapilocanaḥ ..

etaddoṣī hayastyājya uttamo’śvaścatuṣkaraḥ .

ete doṣāśca kathitā hayahastyādiṣūttamāḥ ..

madhyo’rdhahastahīno’śvo muṣṭihastavihīnakaḥ .

kanīyāṁścārdhamānaḥ syādardhasaptastu dīrghataḥ ..

ṣaṇmuṣṭihīnaḥ pañcona uttamādyāstu dīrghataḥ .

asaṁhatā ye ca vāhā hrasvakarṇāstathaiva ca ..

svaranetraprabhāveṣu na dīnāścirajīvinaḥ .

revantapūjanāddhomādrakṣā syāt dvijabhojanāt ..

lohakaṁ nimbapatrāṇi guggulusarṣapā ghṛtam .

tilañcaiva vacā hiṅgu vaghnīyādvājināṁ gale ..

āgantukaṁ doṣajantu vraṇaṁ dvividhamīritam .

cirapākaṁ kharaṁ vātāt pittajaṁ kṣiprapākikam ..

kaṇḍudāhātmakaṁ pittāt sonmādaṁ mandavedanam .

ghanaṁ kaphāt sannipātāt sarvarūpaṁ dvidoṣajam ..

āgantukantu śastrādyairduṣṭavraṇaviśodhanam .

dantīmūlaṁ haridre ddhe citrakaṁ viśvabheṣajam ..

rasonaṁ saindhavaṁ vāpi takrakāñjikapeṣitam .

tilaśaktukapiṇḍokā dadhiyuktā sasaindhavā ..

nimbapatrayutaṁ piṇḍaṁ tilaiḥ śodhanaropaṇam .

karabīrakadalyarkasnuhīkuṭajacitrakaiḥ ..

bhallātasya pacettailaṁ nāḍīvraṇaharaṁ param .

paṅkavalkalakalkena ghṛtena ca pralepayet ..

dve haridre viḍaṅgāni tathā lavaṇapañcakam .

paṭolaṁ nimbapatrañca vacā citrakrameva ca ..

pippalī śṛṅgaverañca cūrṇamekatra kārayet .

etatpānaṁ kṛmiśleṣmamadānilavināśanam ..

nimbapatraṁ paṭolañca triphalā khadiraṁ tathā .

kvāthayitvā tato vāhaṁ śṛtaraktaṁ vicakṣaṇaḥ .

tryahameva pradātavyaṁ pānaṁ kuṣṭhopaśāntaye ..

vrasaṇeṣu ca kuṣṭheṣu tailaṁ sarṣapajaṁ hitam .

pañcavalkalatailaṁ vā daśamūlañca śopanut ..

laśunādīn vade kalpān muktipānāntalepataḥ .

mātuluṅgarasopetaṁ māṁsalārasakena vā .. māṁsalāsyāne

māṁsānāmiti ca pāṭhaḥ .

rasaṁ dadyādasonasya anyairvā tailasaṁyutaiḥ .

paladvaya prathame’hni ekaikapalavṛddhitaḥ ..

yāvaddhi śāntipūrṇā syāttanmātretyuttamātmake madhyame

caturdaśa syuradhame’ṣṭapalāni ca ..

śarannidāghayornaiva deyo naiva tu dāpayet .

tailena vātike pitte śarkarājyapayo’nvitaiḥ ..

kaṭutailaiḥ kaphe vyoṣaiḥ kaphe mudgān kulatthakān .

śāliṣaṣṭikadugdhāśī hayo’khilajugupsitaḥ ..

pakvajambūnibho hemavarṇaḥ śreṣṭhaśca gugguluḥ .

grardhapraharaṇe sūrye gugguluṁ pāyayeddhayam ..

bhojane pāyasaṁ dugdhaṁ nāḍīstisrastanoti saḥ .

vikāle bhojayedaśvaṁ śālyannaṁ vātule dadet ..

māṁsānāñca rasaiḥ pitte madhumudgarasājyakaiḥ .

kaphe mudgān kulatthān vā kaṭutiktān śṛtān haye ..

vyādhite vyādhite śvāse tridoṣādau tu guggulum .

ghāmairdūrvā sarvaroge prathame’hri palaṁ dadet ..

vivardhayet tato varṣamekādipalapañcakam .

uttame syācca catvāri trīṇi madhyajaghanyayoḥ ..

pānena bhojanenaiva aśītipalakaṁ vare .

madhye ṣaṣṭiścādhame’tha catvāriṁśacca bhogiṣu ..

vraṇe kuṣṭheṣu khañjeṣu triphalākvāthasaṁyutam .

mandāgnau śotharoge ca gavāṁ mūtreṇa yojayet ..

vātapittolvaṇe vyādhau gokṣīraghṛtasaṁyutam .

deyaṁ kṛṣāṇāṁ puṣṭyarthaṁ māṣairyaktañca bhojanam ..

supiṣṭāyāḥ pradātavyaṁ guḍūcyāḥ palapañcakam prabhāte

ghṛtasaṁyuktaṁ śaradgrīṣmeṣu vājinām ..

rogaghnaṁ puṣṭidañcāpi balatejovibardhanam .

tadevāśvāya dadyādvai kṣīrayuktamathāpi vā ..

guḍūcīkalkayogena śatāvaryaśvagandhayoḥ .

catvāri troṇi madhyasya jaghanasya palāni hi ..

akasmādyatra vāhānāmekarūpaṁ yadā bhavet .

mriyate ca tadā kṣipraṁ upasargaṁ tamādiśet ..

homādyairakṣayā viprabhojanairbalikarmaṇā .

śāntyopasargaśāntiḥ syāddharītakyādikalpataḥ ..

harītako sagomūtrā tailena lavaṇānvitā .

ādau pañca tataḥ pañcavṛddhyā pūrṇā śatāvadhi .

uttamāśve śataṁ proktamaśātiḥ ṣaṣṭiruttare .. * ..

gajāyurvedamākhyāsye uktāḥ kalpā gaje hitāḥ .

gaje caturguṇā mātrā tābhirgajarugardanam ..

gaṁjopasargavyādhaunāṁ śamanaṁ śāntikarma ca .

pūjayitvā surān viprān brāhmaṇe kapilāṁ dadet ..

dantidantadvaye mālāṁ vivadhnīyādupoṣitaḥ .

mantraṇaṁ mantritā vedyo vacāsiddhārthakāmale ..

sūryādyāḥ śivadurśāśrīrviṣṇutā rakṣasāṁ gaṇaḥ .

baliṁ dadyācca bhūtebhyaḥ snāpayecca caturghaṭaiḥ ..

bhojanaṁ mantritaṁ dadyāt bhasmanodbhūnayedgajam .

bhūtī rakṣā śubhā medhyā vāruṇī rakṣasāṁ sadā ..

trikalā pañcakole ca daśamūlaṁ viḍaṅgakam .

śatāvarī guḍūcī ca nimbavāsakakiṁśukāḥ ..

gajarogavināśāya proktaḥ kalkaḥ kaṣāyakaḥ .

āyurvedo gajāśvānāmuktaḥ saṁkṣepasārataḥ .. iti gāruḍe

hayāyurvedaḥ 207 adhyāyaḥ .. yuktikalpatarūktahayaparīkṣā

ghoṭakaśabde draṣṭavyā .. * .. haye varṇanīyāni yathā . vegaḥ 1

aunnatyam 2 tejaḥ 3 sallakṣaṇasthitiḥ 4 khurotkhātarajaḥ 5 rūpam 6 jātiḥ

7 gativicitratā 8 . iti kavikalpalatā .. * .. atha hayaśakunaḥ .

heṣāravaṁ muñcati vāmato yaḥ kṣuṇṇakṣitirdakṣiṇapādaghātaiḥ .

kaṇḍūyate dakṣiṇamaṅgabhāga tuṅgaṁ turaṅgaḥ sa padaṁ dadāti ..

iti vasantarāje hayaśakunaḥ 13 vargaḥ ..

  • Rating:
  • Views:101 views
  • Tags: -
  • Categories: Sanskrit

Comments

Write a comment

*